SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

(Please read these instructions before using this equipment.)

Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual
carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly.
These precautions apply only to this product. Refer to the Users manual of the QCPU module to use for a
description of the PLC system safety precautions.
In this manual, the safety instructions are ranked as "DANGER" and "CAUTION".

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous

DANGER conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous

CAUTION conditions, resulting in medium or slight personal injury or

physical damage.

Depending on circumstances, procedures indicated by CAUTION may also be linked to serious

results.
In any case, it is important to follow the directions for usage.

Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.

A-1
For Safe Operations
1. Prevention of electric shocks
DANGER
Never open the front case or terminal covers while the power is ON or the unit is running, as this
may lead to electric shocks.
Never run the unit with the front case or terminal cover removed. The high voltage terminal and
charged sections will be exposed and may lead to electric shocks.
Never open the front case or terminal cover at times other than wiring work or periodic
inspections even if the power is OFF. The insides of the Motion controller and servo amplifier are
charged and may lead to electric shocks.
Completely turn off the externally supplied power used in the system before mounting or removing the
module, performing wiring work, or inspections. Failing to do so may lead to electric shocks.
When performing wiring work or inspections, turn the power OFF, wait at least ten minutes, and
then check the voltage with a tester, etc.. Failing to do so may lead to electric shocks.
Be sure to ground the Motion controller, servo amplifier and servomotor. (Ground resistance :
100 or less) Do not ground commonly with other devices.
The wiring work and inspections must be done by a qualified technician.
Wire the units after installing the Motion controller, servo amplifier and servomotor. Failing to do
so may lead to electric shocks or damage.
Never operate the switches with wet hands, as this may lead to electric shocks.
Do not damage, apply excessive stress, place heavy things on or sandwich the cables, as this
may lead to electric shocks.
Do not touch the Motion controller, servo amplifier or servomotor terminal blocks while the power
is ON, as this may lead to electric shocks.
Do not touch the built-in power supply, built-in grounding or signal wires of the Motion controller
and servo amplifier, as this may lead to electric shocks.

2. For fire prevention

CAUTION
Install the Motion controller, servo amplifier, servomotor and regenerative resistor on
incombustible. Installing them directly or close to combustibles will lead to fire.
If a fault occurs in the Motion controller or servo amplifier, shut the power OFF at the servo
amplifier’s power source. If a large current continues to flow, fire may occur.
When using a regenerative resistor, shut the power OFF with an error signal. The regenerative
resistor may abnormally overheat due to a fault in the regenerative transistor, etc., and may lead
to fire.
Always take heat measures such as flame proofing for the inside of the control panel where the
servo amplifier or regenerative resistor is installed and for the wires used. Failing to do so may
lead to fire.
Do not damage, apply excessive stress, place heavy things on or sandwich the cables, as this may
lead to fire.

A-2
3. For injury prevention
CAUTION
Do not apply a voltage other than that specified in the instruction manual on any terminal.
Doing so may lead to destruction or damage.
Do not mistake the terminal connections, as this may lead to destruction or damage.
Do not mistake the polarity ( + / - ), as this may lead to destruction or damage.
Do not touch the heat radiating fins of controller or servo amplifier, regenerative resistor and
servomotor, etc., while the power is ON and for a short time after the power is turned OFF. In this
timing, these parts become very hot and may lead to burns.
Always turn the power OFF before touching the servomotor shaft or coupled machines, as these
parts may lead to injuries.
Do not go near the machine during test operations or during operations such as teaching.
Doing so may lead to injuries.

4. Various precautions
Strictly observe the following precautions.
Mistaken handling of the unit may lead to faults, injuries or electric shocks.
(1) System structure
CAUTION
Always install a leakage breaker on the Motion controller and servo amplifier power source.
If installation of an electromagnetic contactor for power shut off during an error, etc., is specified in
the instruction manual for the servo amplifier, etc., always install the electromagnetic contactor.
Install the emergency stop circuit externally so that the operation can be stopped immediately and
the power shut off.
Use the Motion controller, servo amplifier, servomotor and regenerative resistor with the correct
combinations listed in the instruction manual. Other combinations may lead to fire or faults.
Use the CPU module, base unit and motion module with the correct combinations listed in the
instruction manual. Other combinations may lead to faults.
If safety standards (ex., robot safety rules, etc.,) apply to the system using the Motion controller,
servo amplifier and servomotor, make sure that the safety standards are satisfied.
Construct a safety circuit externally of the Motion controller or servo amplifier if the abnormal
operation of the Motion controller or servo amplifier differ from the safety directive operation in the
system.
In systems where coasting of the servomotor will be a problem during the forced stop, emergency
stop, servo OFF or power supply OFF, use dynamic brakes.
Make sure that the system considers the coasting amount even when using dynamic brakes.
In systems where perpendicular shaft dropping may be a problem during the forced stop,
emergency stop, servo OFF or power supply OFF, use both dynamic brakes and electromagnetic
brakes.

A-3
 CAUTION
The dynamic brakes must be used only on errors that cause the forced stop, emergency stop, or
servo OFF. These brakes must not be used for normal braking.
The brakes (electromagnetic brakes) assembled into the servomotor are for holding applications,
and must not be used for normal braking.
The system must have a mechanical allowance so that the machine itself can stop even if the
stroke limits switch is passed through at the max. speed.
Use wires and cables that have a wire diameter, heat resistance and bending resistance
compatible with the system.
Use wires and cables within the length of the range described in the instruction manual.
The ratings and characteristics of the parts (other than Motion controller, servo amplifier and
servomotor) used in a system must be compatible with the Motion controller, servo amplifier and
servomotor.
Install a cover on the shaft so that the rotary parts of the servomotor are not touched during
operation.
There may be some cases where holding by the electromagnetic brakes is not possible due to the
life or mechanical structure (when the ball screw and servomotor are connected with a timing belt,
etc.). Install a stopping device to ensure safety on the machine side.

(2) Parameter settings and programming

CAUTION
Set the parameter values to those that are compatible with the Motion controller, servo amplifier,
servomotor and regenerative resistor model and the system application. The protective functions
may not function if the settings are incorrect.
The regenerative resistor model and capacity parameters must be set to values that conform to
the operation mode, servo amplifier and servo power supply module. The protective functions
may not function if the settings are incorrect.
Set the mechanical brake output and dynamic brake output validity parameters to values that are
compatible with the system application. The protective functions may not function if the settings
are incorrect.
Set the stroke limit input validity parameter to a value that is compatible with the system
application. The protective functions may not function if the setting is incorrect.
Set the servomotor encoder type (increment, absolute position type, etc.) parameter to a value
that is compatible with the system application. The protective functions may not function if the
setting is incorrect.
Set the servomotor capacity and type (standard, low-inertia, flat, etc.) parameter to values that
are compatible with the system application. The protective functions may not function if the
settings are incorrect.
Set the servo amplifier capacity and type parameters to values that are compatible with the
system application. The protective functions may not function if the settings are incorrect.

A-4
 CAUTION
Use the program commands for the program with the conditions specified in the instruction
manual.
Set the sequence function program capacity setting, device capacity, latch validity range, I/O
assignment setting, and validity of continuous operation during error detection to values that are
compatible with the system application. The protective functions may not function if the settings
are incorrect.
Some devices used in the program have fixed applications, so use these with the conditions
specified in the instruction manual.
The input devices and data registers assigned to the link will hold the data previous to when
communication is terminated by an error, etc. Thus, an error correspondence interlock program
specified in the instruction manual must be used.
Use the interlock program specified in the intelligent function module's instruction manual for the
program corresponding to the intelligent function module.

(3) Transportation and installation

CAUTION
Transport the product with the correct method according to the mass.
Use the servomotor suspension bolts only for the transportation of the servomotor. Do not
transport the servomotor with machine installed on it.
Do not stack products past the limit.
When transporting the Motion controller or servo amplifier, never hold the connected wires or
cables.
When transporting the servomotor, never hold the cables, shaft or detector.
When transporting the Motion controller or servo amplifier, never hold the front case as it may fall
off.
When transporting, installing or removing the Motion controller or servo amplifier, never hold the
edges.
Install the unit according to the instruction manual in a place where the mass can be withstood.
Do not get on or place heavy objects on the product.
Always observe the installation direction.
Keep the designated clearance between the Motion controller or servo amplifier and control panel
inner surface or the Motion controller and servo amplifier, Motion controller or servo amplifier and
other devices.
Do not install or operate Motion controller, servo amplifiers or servomotors that are damaged or
that have missing parts.
Do not block the intake/outtake ports of the Motion controller, servo amplifier and servomotor with
cooling fan.
Do not allow conductive matter such as screw or cutting chips or combustible matter such as oil
enter the Motion controller, servo amplifier or servomotor.

A-5
 CAUTION
The Motion controller, servo amplifier and servomotor are precision machines, so do not drop or
apply strong impacts on them.
Securely fix the Motion controller, servo amplifier and servomotor to the machine according to
the instruction manual. If the fixing is insufficient, these may come off during operation.
Always install the servomotor with reduction gears in the designated direction. Failing to do so
may lead to oil leaks.
Store and use the unit in the following environmental conditions.
Conditions
Environment
Motion controller/Servo amplifier Servomotor
Ambient 0°C to +40°C (With no freezing)
According to each instruction manual.
temperature (32°F to +104°F)
80% RH or less
Ambient humidity According to each instruction manual.
(With no dew condensation)
Storage -20°C to +65°C
According to each instruction manual.
temperature (-4°F to +149°F)
Indoors (where not subject to direct sunlight).
Atmosphere
No corrosive gases, flammable gases, oil mist or dust must exist
Altitude 1000m (3280.84ft.) or less above sea level
Vibration According to each instruction manual
When coupling with the synchronous encoder or servomotor shaft end, do not apply impact such
as by hitting with a hammer. Doing so may lead to detector damage.
Do not apply a load larger than the tolerable load onto the synchronous encoder and servomotor
shaft. Doing so may lead to shaft breakage.
When not using the module for a long time, disconnect the power line from the Motion controller
or servo amplifier.
Place the Motion controller and servo amplifier in static electricity preventing vinyl bags and store.
When storing for a long time, please contact with our sales representative.
Also, execute a trial operation.

A-6
(4) Wiring
CAUTION
Correctly and securely wire the wires. Reconfirm the connections for mistakes and the terminal
screws for tightness after wiring. Failing to do so may lead to run away of the servomotor.
After wiring, install the protective covers such as the terminal covers to the original positions.
Do not install a phase advancing capacitor, surge absorber or radio noise filter (option FR-BIF)
on the output side of the servo amplifier.
Correctly connect the output side (terminal U, V, W). Incorrect connections will lead the
servomotor to operate abnormally.
Do not connect a commercial power supply to the servomotor, as this may lead to trouble.
Do not mistake the direction of the surge absorbing diode
installed on the DC relay for the control signal output of brake Servo amplifier
signals, etc. Incorrect installation may lead to signals not being VIN
(24VDC)
output when trouble occurs or the protective functions not
functioning. Control output
RA
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between signal
each unit, the encoder cable or PLC expansion cable while the
power is ON.
Securely tighten the cable connector fixing screws and fixing mechanisms. Insufficient fixing may
lead to the cables combing off during operation.
Do not bundle the power line or cables.

(5) Trial operation and adjustment

CAUTION
Confirm and adjust the program and each parameter before operation. Unpredictable
movements may occur depending on the machine.
Extreme adjustments and changes may lead to unstable operation, so never make them.
When using the absolute position system function, on starting up, and when the Motion
controller or absolute value motor has been replaced, always perform a home position return.

A-7
(6) Usage methods
CAUTION
Immediately turn OFF the power if smoke, abnormal sounds or odors are emitted from the Motion
controller, servo amplifier or servomotor.
Always execute a test operation before starting actual operations after the program or
parameters have been changed or after maintenance and inspection.
Do not attempt to disassemble and repair the units excluding a qualified technician whom our
company recognized.
Do not make any modifications to the unit.
Keep the effect or electromagnetic obstacles to a minimum by installing a noise filter or by using
wire shields, etc. Electromagnetic obstacles may affect the electronic devices used near the
Motion controller or servo amplifier.
When using the CE Mark-compliant equipment, refer to the "EMC Installation Guidelines" (data
number IB(NA)-67339) for the Motion controllers and refer to the corresponding EMC guideline
information for the servo amplifiers, inverters and other equipment.
Use the units with the following conditions.
Conditions
Item
Q61P-A1 Q61P-A2 Q61P Q62P Q63P Q64P
+10% +10% +10% +30% +10%
100 to 120VAC 200 to 240VAC 100 to 240VAC 24VDC 100 to 120VAC /
-15% -15% -15% -35% -15%
+10%
Input power 200 to 240VAC -15%
(85 to 132VAC) (170 to 264VAC) (85 to 264VAC) (15.6 to 31.2VDC) (85 to 132VAC/
170 to 264VAC)
Input frequency 50/60Hz ±5%
Tolerable
momentary 20ms or less
power failure

A-8
(7) Corrective actions for errors
CAUTION
If an error occurs in the self diagnosis of the Motion controller or servo amplifier, confirm the
check details according to the instruction manual, and restore the operation.
If a dangerous state is predicted in case of a power failure or product failure, use a servomotor
with electromagnetic brakes or install a brake mechanism externally.
Use a double circuit construction so that the electromagnetic brake operation circuit can be
operated by emergency stop signals set externally.
Shut off with the
Shut off with servo ON signal OFF, emergency stop
alarm, electromagnetic brake signal. signal(EMG).

Servomotor
RA1 EMG

Electro-
magnetic 24VDC
brakes

If an error occurs, remove the cause, secure the safety and then resume operation after alarm
release.
The unit may suddenly resume operation after a power failure is restored, so do not go near the
machine. (Design the machine so that personal safety can be ensured even if the machine
restarts suddenly.)

(8) Maintenance, inspection and part replacement

CAUTION
Perform the daily and periodic inspections according to the instruction manual.
Perform maintenance and inspection after backing up the program and parameters for the Motion
controller and servo amplifier.
Do not place fingers or hands in the clearance when opening or closing any opening.
Periodically replace consumable parts such as batteries according to the instruction manual.
Do not touch the lead sections such as ICs or the connector contacts.
Before touching the module, always touch grounded metal, etc. to discharge static electricity from
human body. Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction.
Do not directly touch the module's conductive parts and electronic components.
Touching them could cause an operation failure or give damage to the module.
Do not place the Motion controller or servo amplifier on metal that may cause a power leakage
or wood, plastic or vinyl that may cause static electricity buildup.
Do not perform a megger test (insulation resistance measurement) during inspection.

A-9
 CAUTION
When replacing the Motion controller or servo amplifier, always set the new module settings
correctly.
When the Motion controller or absolute value motor has been replaced, carry out a home position
return operation using one of the following methods, otherwise position displacement could occur.
1) After writing the servo data to the Motion controller using programming software, switch on the
power again, then perform a home position return operation.
2) Using the backup function of the programming software, load the data backed up before
replacement.
After maintenance and inspections are completed, confirm that the position detection of the
absolute position detector function is correct.
Do not drop or impact the battery installed to the module.
Doing so may damage the battery, causing battery liquid to leak in the battery. Do not use the
dropped or impacted battery, but dispose of it.
Do not short circuit, charge, overheat, incinerate or disassemble the batteries.
The electrolytic capacitor will generate gas during a fault, so do not place your face near the
Motion controller or servo amplifier.
Lock the control panel and prevent access to those who are not certified to handle or install
electric equipment.
Do not bum or break a module and servo amplifier. Doing so may cause a toxic gas.

(9) About processing of waste

When you discard Motion controller, servo amplifier, a battery (primary battery) and other option articles,
please follow the law of each country (area).

CAUTION
This product is not designed or manufactured to be used in equipment or systems in situations
that can affect or endanger human life.
When considering this product for operation in special applications such as machinery or systems
used in passenger transportation, medical, aerospace, atomic power, electric power, or
submarine repeating applications, please contact your nearest Mitsubishi sales representative.
Although this product was manufactured under conditions of strict quality control, you are strongly
advised to install safety devices to forestall serious accidents when it is used in facilities where a
breakdown in the product is likely to cause a serious accident.

(10) General cautions

CAUTION
All drawings provided in the instruction manual show the state with the covers and safety
partitions removed to explain detailed sections. When operating the product, always return the
covers and partitions to the designated positions, and operate according to the instruction manual.

A - 10
REVISIONS
The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print Date Manual Number Revision
Oct., 2008 IB(NA)-0300150-A First edition
Sep.,2009 IB(NA)-0300150-B [Additional correction/partial correction]
About manuals, EMC directive, Battery transportation, Symbol for the
new EU battery directive, MC protocol communication, Synchronous
encoder current value monitor in real mode, Connection of the servo
amplifier for direct drive motor

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent
licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property
rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

© 2008 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

A - 11
 INTRODUCTION

Thank you for choosing the Mitsubishi Motion controller MR-MQ100.

Before using the equipment, please read this manual carefully to develop full familiarity with the functions
and performance of the Motion controller you have purchased, so as to ensure correct use.

CONTENTS

Safety Precautions .........................................................................................................................................A- 1

Revisions ........................................................................................................................................................A-11
Contents .........................................................................................................................................................A-12
About Manuals ...............................................................................................................................................A-16

1. OVERVIEW 1- 1 to 1- 4

1.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................... 1- 1
1.2 Differences between MR-MQ100 and Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU ........................................................... 1- 3
1.3 Combination of software version and a function..................................................................................... 1- 4

2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2- 1 to 2-36

2.1 Motion System Configuration .................................................................................................................. 2- 1

2.1.1 MR-MQ100 System overall configuration ........................................................................................ 2- 3
2.1.2 Function explanation of the MR-MQ100 Motion controller .............................................................. 2- 4
2.1.3 Restrictions on Motion controller ...................................................................................................... 2- 4
2.2 Checking Serial Number.......................................................................................................................... 2- 5
2.3 System Configuration Equipment............................................................................................................ 2- 6
2.4 General Specifications ............................................................................................................................. 2- 8
2.5 Specifications of Equipment and Settings............................................................................................... 2- 9
2.5.1 Name of parts for MR-MQ100 .......................................................................................................... 2- 9
2.5.2 MR-MQ100 hardware and wiring...................................................................................................... 2-15
2.5.3 Connecting of 24VDC power supply connector of MR-MQ100....................................................... 2-23
2.5.4 SSCNET cables and connection method...................................................................................... 2-25
2.5.5 Battery ............................................................................................................................................... 2-28
2.5.6 Software specification of MR-MQ100............................................................................................... 2-33

3. DESIGN 3- 1 to 3-10

3.1 System Designing Procedure .................................................................................................................. 3- 1

3.2 External Circuit Design ............................................................................................................................ 3- 4
3.2.1 Power supply circuit design .............................................................................................................. 3- 6
3.2.2 Safety circuit design .......................................................................................................................... 3- 8
3.3 Layout Design within The Control Panel ................................................................................................. 3- 9
3.3.1 Mounting environment ...................................................................................................................... 3- 9
3.3.2 Layout design of the Motion controller ............................................................................................. 3-10
3.3.3 Calculating heat generation by Motion controller............................................................................. 3-11
3.4 Design Checklist ...................................................................................................................................... 3-11

A - 12
4. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 4- 1 to 4-16

4.1 Motion controller Installation .................................................................................................................... 4- 1

4.1.1 Instructions for handling .................................................................................................................... 4- 1
4.1.2 Motion controller Installation ............................................................................................................. 4- 2
4.1.3 Instructions for mounting the Motion controller ................................................................................ 4- 3
4.2 Connection and disconnection of Cable.................................................................................................. 4- 6
4.2.1 SSCNET cable ............................................................................................................................... 4- 6
4.2.2 24VDC power supply cable .............................................................................................................. 4-12
4.3 Wiring........................................................................................................................................................ 4-13
4.3.1 Instructions for wiring ........................................................................................................................ 4-13
4.3.2 Connecting to the power supply module .......................................................................................... 4-16

5. TRIAL OPERATION AND ADJUSTMENT 5- 1 to 5- 8

5.1 Checklist before Trial Operation .............................................................................................................. 5- 1

5.2 Trial Operation and Adjustment Procedure............................................................................................. 5- 2
5.3 Operating System Software Installation Procedure................................................................................ 5- 6
5.4 Trial Operation and Adjustment Checklist............................................................................................... 5- 7

6. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 6- 1 to 6-26

6.1 Maintenance Works ................................................................................................................................. 6- 2

6.1.1 Instruction of Inspection works ......................................................................................................... 6- 2
6.2 Daily Inspection ........................................................................................................................................ 6- 4
6.3 Periodic Inspection................................................................................................................................... 6- 5
6.4 Life ............................................................................................................................................................ 6- 6
6.5 Battery ...................................................................................................................................................... 6- 7
6.5.1 Battery life.......................................................................................................................................... 6- 8
6.5.2 Battery replacement procedure ........................................................................................................ 6-10
6.5.3 Resuming operation after storing the Motion controller ................................................................... 6-11
6.5.4 Symbol for the new EU Battery Directive ......................................................................................... 6-11
6.6 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................................... 6-12
6.6.1 Troubleshooting basics ..................................................................................................................... 6-12
6.6.2 Troubleshooting of Motion CPU module .......................................................................................... 6-13
6.6.3 Confirming error code ....................................................................................................................... 6-24
6.6.4 I/O circuit troubleshooting ................................................................................................................. 6-25

7. POSITIONING DEDICATED SIGNALS 7- 1 to 7-32

7.1 Device List ................................................................................................................................................ 7- 1

7.2 Internal relays .......................................................................................................................................... 7- 2
7.2.1 Internal relay list ................................................................................................................................ 7- 2
7.2.2 Axis status list.................................................................................................................................... 7- 4
7.2.3 Axis command signal list................................................................................................................... 7- 5
7.2.4 Virtual servomotor axis status list ..................................................................................................... 7- 6
7.2.5 Virtual servomotor axis command signal list .................................................................................... 7- 7
7.2.6 Synchronous encoder axis status list ............................................................................................... 7- 8

A - 13
 7.2.7 Synchronous encoder axis command signal list.............................................................................. 7- 8
7.2.8 Common device list........................................................................................................................... 7- 9
7.2.9 Common device list (Command device) .......................................................................................... 7-12
7.3 Data Registers.......................................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.3.1 Common device list (Command device) .......................................................................................... 7-13
7.3.2 Axis monitor device list...................................................................................................................... 7-15
7.3.3 Control change register list ............................................................................................................... 7-16
7.3.4 Virtual servomotor axis monitor device list ....................................................................................... 7-17
7.3.5 Synchronous encoder axis monitor device list................................................................................. 7-18
7.3.6 Cam axis monitor device list ............................................................................................................. 7-18
7.3.7 Common device list........................................................................................................................... 7-19
7.4 Motion registers........................................................................................................................................ 7-20
7.4.1 Motion registers................................................................................................................................. 7-20
7.4.2 Axis monitor device 2 ........................................................................................................................ 7-21
7.4.3 Motion error history devices.............................................................................................................. 7-22
7.4.4 Mark detection area .......................................................................................................................... 7-23
7.5 Special relays/Special registers............................................................................................................... 7-25
7.5.1 Special relays .................................................................................................................................... 7-25
7.5.2 Special registers................................................................................................................................ 7-28

8. Parameters for positioning control 8- 1 to 8-8

8.1 Fixed Parameters..................................................................................................................................... 8- 1

8.2 Parameter Block....................................................................................................................................... 8- 2
8.3 JOG operation data.................................................................................................................................. 8- 4
8.4 Home Position Return.............................................................................................................................. 8- 5
8.5 Servo Parameter ...................................................................................................................................... 8- 8

9. SERVO PROGRAMS FOR POSITIONING CONTROL 9- 1 to 9-22

9.1 Servo Program Composition Area........................................................................................................... 9- 1

9.1.1 Servo program composition.............................................................................................................. 9- 1
9.1.2 Servo program area .......................................................................................................................... 9- 2
9.2 Servo Instructions .................................................................................................................................... 9- 3
9.3 Positioning Data ....................................................................................................................................... 9-16

10. MOTION SFC PROGRAMS 10- 1 to 10-16

10.1 Motion SFC Performance Specifications ............................................................................................ 10- 1

10.2 Motion SFC Chart Symbol List ............................................................................................................ 10- 3
10.3 Branch and Coupling Chart List .......................................................................................................... 10- 6
10.4 Operation control/transition control specifications .............................................................................. 10-10
10.5 Program Parameters............................................................................................................................ 10-14
10.6 Device Descriptions ............................................................................................................................. 10-15

11. MECHANICAL SYSTEM PROGRAM 11- 1 to 11-6

11.1 Mechanical Module Connection Diagram ........................................................................................... 11- 2

11.2 Mechanical Module List ....................................................................................................................... 11- 5
11.3 Device range ........................................................................................................................................ 11- 6
A - 14
12. COMMUNICATION 12- 1 to 12-8

12.1 Connection to peripheral devices ........................................................................................................ 12- 1

12.2 Direct connection ................................................................................................................................. 12- 1
12.3 Connection with HUB........................................................................................................................... 12- 3
12.4 Setting CPU name ............................................................................................................................... 12- 8

13. AUXILIARY FUNCTION 13- 1 to 13-8

13.1 Mark detection function........................................................................................................................ 13- 1

13.2 High-Speed Reading of Specified Data .............................................................................................. 13- 8
13.3 MC Protocol Communication............................................................................................................... 13- 9
13.4 Synchronous encoder for drive module .............................................................................................. 13-15

14. ERROR CODE 14- 1 to 14-4

14.1 Self-diagnosis errors ............................................................................................................................ 14- 1

14.2 System setting errors ........................................................................................................................... 14- 2
14.3 Servo program setting error................................................................................................................. 14- 3

15. EMC DIRECTIVES 15- 1 to 15-8

15.1 Requirements for Compliance with the EMC Directive ...................................................................... 15- 1
15.1.1 Standards relevant to the EMC Directive ..................................................................................... 15- 2
15.1.2 Installation instructions for EMC Directive.................................................................................... 15- 3
15.1.3 Parts of measure against noise .................................................................................................... 15- 5
15.1.4 Example of measure against noise .............................................................................................. 15- 7

APPENDICES App- 1 to App-10

APPENDIX 1 Cables .................................................................................................................................App- 1

APPENDIX 1.1 SSCNET cables.........................................................................................................App- 1
APPENDIX 1.2 24VDC power supply cable..........................................................................................App- 4
APPENDIX 1.3 Internal I/F connector cable..........................................................................................App- 5
APPENDIX 2 Exterior Dimensions ............................................................................................................App- 7
APPENDIX 2.1 MR-MQ100 ...................................................................................................................App- 7
APPENDIX 2.2 Battery holder ...............................................................................................................App- 8
APPENDIX 2.3 Connector .....................................................................................................................App- 9

A - 15
About Manuals

The following manuals are also related to this product.

If necessary, order them by quoting the details in the tables below.

Related Manuals

(1) Motion controller

Manual Number
Manual Name
(Model Code)
Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller Programming Manual (COMMON)
This manual explains the Multiple CPU system configuration, performance specifications, common IB-0300134
parameters, auxiliary/applied functions, error lists and others. (1XB928)
(Optional)

Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller (SV13/SV22) Programming Manual (Motion SFC)

IB-0300135
This manual explains the functions, programming, debugging, error lists and others for Motion SFC.
(1XB929)
(Optional)

Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller (SV13/SV22) Programming Manual (REAL MODE)

IB-0300136
This manual explains the servo parameters, positioning instructions, device lists, error lists and others.
(1XB930)
(Optional)

Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller (SV22) Programming Manual (VIRTUAL MODE)

This manual explains the dedicated instructions to use the synchronous control by virtual main shaft,
IB-0300137
mechanical system program create mechanical module, servo parameters, positioning instructions, device
(1XB931)
lists, error lists and others.
(Optional)

Motion Controller Setup Guidance(for MR-MQ100)

(MT Developer2 Version1)
IB-0300152
This manual describes those items related to the setup of the Motion controller programming software
MT Developer2 (for MR-MQ100).

A - 16
(3) Servo amplifier
Manual Number
Manual Name
(Model Code)
MR-J3- B Servo amplifier Instruction Manual
This manual explains the I/O signals, parts names, parameters, start-up procedure and others for SH-030051
MR-J3- B Servo amplifier. (1CW202)
(Optional)

MR-J3- B-RJ004 Linear Servo amplifier Instruction Manual

SH-030054
This manual explains the I/O signals, parts names, parameters, start-up procedure and others for
(1CW943)
MR-J3- B-RJ004 Linear Servo amplifier. (Optional)

Fully Closed Loop Control MR-J3- B-RJ006 Servo amplifier Instruction Manual
SH-030056
This manual explains the I/O signals, parts names, parameters, start-up procedure and others for Fully
(1CW304)
Closed Loop Control MR-J3- B-RJ006 Servo amplifier. (Optional)

A - 17
MEMO

A - 18
1 OVERVIEW

1. OVERVIEW

1.1 Overview 1
This User's Manual describes the hardware specifications, the software specifications
and handling methods of the Motion controller.
This manual explains the changes between the MR-MQ100 and Q173DCPU /
Q172DCPU.
Refer to the other motion controller manuals for details of each function.
In this manual, the following abbreviations are used.
Generic term/Abbreviation Description
MR-MQ100 or
MR-MQ100 Single Axis Motion Controller
Motion controller
MR-J3- B Servo amplifier model MR-J3- B
AMP or Servo amplifier General name for "Servo amplifier model MR-J3- B "
Programming software package General name for MT Developer/GX Developer/MR Configurator
Operating system software General name for "SW9DNC-SV22QW"
SV22 Operating system software for automatic machinery : SW9DNC -SV22QW
Abbreviation for "Motion controller engineering environment
MELSOFT MT Works2 MELSOFT MT Works2 for MR-MQ100"
SW1DNC-MTW2MQ-E (Version 1.04E or later)
(Note-1)
MT Developer2 Abbreviation for "Motion controller programming software MT Developer2"

Abbreviation for "Servo setup software package

MR Configurator
MR Configurator (Version C1 or later)"
(Note-2) High speed synchronous network between Motion controller and servo
SSCNET
amplifier
General name for "system using the servomotor and servo amplifier for
Absolute position system
absolute position"
(Note-1) : This software is included in Motion controller engineering environment "MELSOFT MT Works2"
(Note-2) : SSCNET: Servo System Controller NETwork

1-1
1 OVERVIEW

REMARK
For information about each module and design methods for programs and
parameters, refer to the following manuals.

Item Reference Manual

Operation method for MT Developer2 Help of each software
• Performance specification
Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller
• Design method for common parameter
Programming Manual (COMMON)
• Auxiliary and applied functions (common)
• Design method for Motion SFC program Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller
SV22 • Design method for Motion SFC parameter (SV13/SV22) Programming Manual (Motion SFC)
• Design method for positioning control
program in the real mode Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller
• Design method for positioning control (SV13/SV22) Programming Manual (REAL MODE)
parameter
SV22 • Design method for mechanical system Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller
(Virtual mode) program (SV22) Programming Manual (VIRTUAL MODE)

1-2
1 OVERVIEW

1.2 Comparison between MR-MQ100 and Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU

Items MR-MQ100 Q173DCPU Q172DCPU

0.44ms/ 1 to 4 axes
Operation cycle 0.88ms/ 5 to 12 axes 0.44ms/ 1 to 4 axes
SV22 0.44ms/ 1 axis
(default) 1.77ms/13 to 28 axes 0.88ms/ 5 to 8 axes
3.55ms/29 to 32 axes
Medium of operating system
CD-ROM (1 disk) CD-ROM (1 disk)
software
Model of operating system
SW9DNC-SV22QW SW8DNC-SV Q
software
Peripheral I/F PERIPHRAL I/F Via PLC CPU (USB/RS-232)
PTP(Point to Point) control,
PTP(Point to Point) control,
Speed control,
Speed control,
Speed-position control
Speed-position control,
(The changing signal comes via servo amplifier)
(Note-1),
Fixed-pitch feed,
Fixed-pitch feed,
Control modes Constant speed control,
Constant speed control,
Position follow-up control,
Position follow-up control,
Speed control with position stop,
Speed control with position stop,
Speed switching control,
Speed switching control,
High-speed osillation control,
High-speed oscillation control,
Synchronous control(SV22)
Synchronous control(SV22)
Manual pulse generator Possible to connect 1 module Possible to connect 3 modules
Synchronus encoder Possible to connect 1 module Possible to connect 12 Possible to connect 8
operation function (Only incremental) modules modules
Number of SSCNET
1 system 2 systems 1 system
systems (Note-2)
External input signal of servo amplifier Q172DLX or
External input signal
(FLS,RLS,DOG) External input signal of servo amplifier
Servo amplifier has EM1 as the forced stop input. • Use EMI terminal of Motion CPU module
Forced stop input (The motion controller does not have the forced stop • Use device set by forced stop input setting in the
input.) system setting.
Necessity of Operating
No need to install. (It is already installed.) Need to install
System Software Installation
(Note-1) : "DOG" signal of servo amplifier is used as "Speed-position changing signal" of Speed-position control mode.
(Note-2) : SSCNET: Servo System Controller NETwork

1-3
1 OVERVIEW

1.3 Combination of software version and a function

There are combination in the function that can be used by the version of the
operating system software and programming software.
The combination of each version and a function is shown below.

(1) Combination of software version and a function

Programming software Section of
Operating system software
Function version reference
version
(MELSOFT MT Works2)

MC protocol communication 00B 1.06G Section 13.3

Incremental synchronous encoder

00B - Section 13.4
current value in real mode
Connection of the servo amplifier for direct drive
00B 1.06G -
motor

(2) Confirmation method of the operating system software's version

The operating system software's version of connected Motion controller is
displayed on the OS type item of the [Read from CPU ] screen in MT
Developer2.

Operating system software

S V 2 2 Q W V E R 3 0 0 B

Version

1-4
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
This section describes MR-MQ100 system configurations and usage precautions.

2.1 Motion System Configuration

(1) Equipment configuration for MR-MQ100 system 2

0QVG

MITSUBISHI
LITHIUM BATTERY

$CVVGT[ /QVKQPEQPVTQNNGT

3$#6
/4/3

0QVG

M IT S U B I S H I
L IT H I U M B A T T E R Y

PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER PUSH

TYPE Q7BAT

.CTIGECRCEKV[ 55%0'6ΥECDNG
DCVVGT[JQNFGT
/4,$75‫غ‬/
#$

3/$#65'6

5GTXQCORNKHKGT

/4,‫غ‬$

+VKURQUUKDNGVQUGNGEVVJGDGUVCEEQTFKPIVQVJGU[UVGO

0QVG$GUWTGVQKPUVCNNVJG$CVVGT[
3$#6VQVJG$CVVGT[JQNFGT

+VKURCEMGFVQIGVJGTYKVJ/4/3

0QVG.CTIGECRCEKV[DCVVGT[WUG
3$#6KUKPENWFGFUQNFUGRCTCVGN[
㪅

2-1
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

(2) Peripheral device configuration for the MR-MQ100 system

Peripheral connection options are shown below.

/QVKQPEQPVTQNNGT

/4/3

'VJGTPGVECDNG

%QORWVGT

Part Connection Cable Ethernet

Model name
name type type standard
Connection Straight 10BASE-T
Ethernet with HUB cable 100BASE-TX Compliant with Ethernet standards, category 5 or higher.
cable Direct Crossover 10BASE-T • Shielded twisted pair cable (STP cable)
connection cable 100BASE-TX

(a) Selection criterion of cable

• Category : 5 or higher
• Diameter of lead : AWG26 or higher
• Shield : Copper braid shield and drain wire
Copper braid shield and aluminium layered type shield

2-2
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.1.1 MR-MQ100 System overall configuration

PULL

2'4+2*'4#.+(

F

0QVG 'ZVGTPCNKPRWVUKIPCNUQH
UGTXQCORNKHKGT
/ 2TQZKOKV[FQI
7RRGTUVTQMGNKOKV
' .QYGTUVTQMGNKOKV

8&%
/4,‫غ‬$V[RG
5GTXQCORNKHKGT
CZKU

2 /CPWCNRWNUGIGPGTCVQTQT+PETGOGPVCN
U[PEJTQPQWUGPEQFGT UGV
2CPGNEQORWVGT
+PRWVRQKPVU1WVRWVRQKPVU

(Note-1) Up to 16 different equipments can access to a single motion controller.

POINT
The latest operating system software "SW9DNC-SV22QW" is preinstalled in
the MR-MQ100. There is no need for customer installation.

CAUTION
Construct a safety circuit externally of the Motion controller or servo amplifier if the abnormal
operation of the Motion controller or servo amplifier differ from the safety directive operation in the
system.
The ratings and characteristics of the parts (other than Motion controller, servo amplifier and
servomotor) used in a system must be compatible with the Motion controller, servo amplifier and
servomotor.
Set the parameter values to those that are compatible with the Motion controller, servo amplifier,
servomotor and regenerative resistor model and the system application. The protective functions
may not function if the settings are incorrect.

Restriction matter
The Motion controller does not have a forced stop input, therefore the forced stop
function on the servo amplifier should be used.

2-3
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.1.2 Function explanations of the MR-MQ100 Motion Controller

(1) A single servo amplifiers axis can be used with each MR-MQ100 system.

(2) The program is synchronized with the motion operation cycle and can be set to a
fixed cycle (0.44[ms], 0.88[ms], 1.77[ms], 3.55[ms], 7.11[ms], 14.2[ms]).

(3) Download of servo parameters, sending of servo ON/OFF and position

commands, etc. can be accomplished by connecting an SSCNET cable
between the MR-MQ100 and servo amplifier.

(4) A single incremental synchronous encoder can be used to achieve synchronous

control with an external axis. Hereafter, "INC" will be used instead of
"incremental ".

(5) The Motion controller uses the servo amplifier’s "stroke limit" and "DOG signal"
inputs.

(6) The MR-MQ100 has 4 digital inputs and 2 digital outputs. (The input signals can
be used as "Mark detection signals")

2.1.3 Restrictions on Motion controller

(1) Since the Motion controller does not contain a forced stop input, the forced stop
function of the servo amplifier should be used.

(2) Be sure to connect the battery (Q6BAT) which is included with MR-MQ100.

(3) It takes about 10 sec for the Motion controller to power up after 24VDC power is
applied.

(4) Set the rotary switch on the servo amplifier to "0".

2-4
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.2 Checking Serial Number

The serial number of the Motion controller can be viewed both on the rating plate and
the face of the module.

(1) Location of the Motion Controller serial number information.

(a) On the rating plate
The rating plate is located on the left side of the Motion controller.

(b) On the face of the Motion Controller

The serial number is printed on the bottom area of the face of the motion
controller.

PULL

MITSUBISHI
4CVKPIRNCVG ;΀΅ͺ΀Ϳ͑ʹ΀Ϳ΅΃΀ͽͽͶ΃
;΀͵Ͷͽ
ऍ࣭ࣳ࣬उࣿऌऑ
ऌࣽएएँऀ

5GTKCNPWODGT एँऎअࣽई
C UL
ࣾࣴकࣰࣱࣲ࣯࣬࣬
80M1 IND. CONT. EQ
US LISTED

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ͻͲ΁ͲͿ

5GTKCNPWODGT
FKURNC[RNCVG

2-5
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION


2.3 System Configuration Equipment

(1) Table of Motion Controller related items

(Note-1)
Item Model name Description Remark
1 axis control, Operation cycle 0.44[ms] or more,
Servo program capacity 16k steps,
Internal I/F (Incremental synchronous encoder interface 1ch, Input
Motion controller MR-MQ100
signal/Mark detection input signal 4 points, Output signal 2 points)
(Attachment battery (Q6BAT), Internal I/F conector , 24VDC power supply
connector)
For memory data backup of SRAM built-in Motion controller included with
Battery Q6BAT
Nominal current: 1800mAh MR-MQ100
Large capacity For memory data backup of SRAM built-in Motion controller
Q7BAT
batterry Nominal current: 5000mAh
Large capacity
Q170MBAT-SET Battery holder for Q7BAT (Attachment Q7BAT)
battery holder
Internal I/F Incremental synchronous encoder , included with
Q170MIOCON
connector set Mark detection signal interface connector MR-MQ100
Q170MPWCBL2M Length 2m(6.56ft.), With solderless terminal R1.25-3.5
24VDC power
Length 2m(6.56ft.), With solderless terminal R1.25-3.5, With EMI
supply cable Q170MPWCBL2M-E
terminal
24VDC power included with
Q170MPWCON Connector for 24VDC power supply cable
supply connector set MR-MQ100
• MR-MQ100 MR-J3- B
MR-J3BUS M • Standard code for inside panel
• 0.15m(0.49ft.), 0.3m(0.98ft.), 0.5m(1.64ft.), 1m(3,28ft.), 3m(9.84ft.)
• MR-MQ100 MR-J3- B
SSCNET cable MR-J3BUS M-A • Standard cable for outside panel
• 5m(16.40ft.), 10m(32.81ft.), 20m(65.62ft.)
• MR-MQ100 MR-J3- B
(Note-2)
MR-J3BUS M-B • Long distance cable
• 30m(98.43ft.), 40m(131.23ft.), 50m(164.04ft.)
(Note-1) : =Cable length (015: 0.15m(0.49ft.), 03: 0.3m(0.98ft.), 05: 0.5m(1.64ft.), 1: 1m(3.28ft.), 2: 2m(6.56ft.),
3: 3m(9.84ft.), 5: 5m(16.40ft.), 10: 10m(32.81ft.), 20: 20m(65.62ft.), 25: 25m(82.02ft.), 30:
30m(98.43ft.), 40: 40m(131.23ft.), 50:50m(164.04ft.)
(Note-2) : Please contact your nearest Mitsubishi sales representative for the cable of less than 30m(98.43ft.).

(2) Table of Servo amplifier related items

Item Model name Description 4GOCTM

MR-J3- B
MR-J3- B-RJ004 For linear servo motor Refer to the servo amplifier
MR-J3 series
MR-J3- B-RJ006 For fully closed control . instruction manuals.
servo amplifier
MR-J3- B-RJ080W For direct drive motor.
MR-J3- BS For safety servo
Back-up for the absolute position
Battery MR-J3BAT
detection

2-6
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

(3) Software packages

(a) Operating system software
Application Model name Medium
For automatic machinery SV22 SW9DNC-SV22QW CD-ROM (1 disk)

(b) Motion controller engineering environment

Part name Model name Medium

MELSOFT MT Works2
for MR-MQ100 SW1DNC-MTW2MQ-E CD-ROM (1 disk)
(Note-1)
(MT Developer2 )
(Note-1) : This software is included in Motion controller engineering environment "MELSOFT MT Works2".

(c) Servo set up software package

Part name Model name Details

MR Configurator MRZJW3-SETUP221E Version C1 or later

POINT
(1) When operating this software, if the operation of Windows is unclear, please
refer to a Windows manual or guide-book from another supplier.

(2) Use "standard size font" setting in Windows. When using the "Big font", setting
the display might not be shown properly.

2-7
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.4 General Specifications

General specifications of MR-MQ100 Motion Controller are shown below.

Item Specification
Operating ambient temperature 0 to 55°C (32 to 131°F)
Storage ambient temperature -25 to 75°C (-13 to 167°F) (Note-3)
Operating ambient humidity 5 to 95% RH, non-condensing
Storage ambient humidity 5 to 95% RH, non-condensing
Frequency Acceleration Amplitude Sweep count
3.5mm
Under intermittent 5 to 9Hz ——
(0.14inch) 10 times each
vibration
Vibration resistance 9 to 150Hz 9.8m/s2 —— in X, Y, Z
1.75mm directions
Under continuous 5 to 9Hz ——
(0.07inch) (For 80 min.)
vibration 2
9 to 150Hz 4.9m/s ——
2
Shock resistance 147m/s , 3 times in each of 3 directions X, Y, Z

Operating ambience No corrosive gases

Operating altitude 2000m(6561.68ft.) or less

Mounting location Inside control panel

Overvoltage category (Note-1) II or less

Pollution level (Note-2) 2 or less

(Note-1) : This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the
public electrical power distribution network and the machinery within premises.
Category applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities.
The surge voltage withstand level for up to the rated voltage of 300V is 2500V.
(Note-2) : This index indicates the degree to which conductive material is generated in terms of the environment in which
the equipment is used.
Pollution level 2 is when only non-conductive pollution occurs. A temporary conductivity caused by condensing
must be expected occasionally.
(Note-3) : Do not use or store the Motion controller under pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure of altitude 0m.
Doing so can cause an operation failure.

CAUTION
The Motion controller must be stored and used under the conditions listed in the table of
specifications above.
When not using the module for a long time, disconnect the power line from the Motion controller
or servo amplifier.
Place the Motion controller and servo amplifier in static electricity preventing vinyl bags and
store.
When storing for a long time, please contact with our sales representative.
Also, execute a trial operation.

2-8
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.5 Specifications of Equipment and Settings

2.5.1 Name of parts for MR-MQ100

This section explains the names and settings of the module.

(1) MR-MQ100












CAUTION
Close the clear cover, after using the rotary switches.

2-9
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

No. Name Application

1) 7-segment LED • Indicates the operating status and error information.
Rotary function select 1 switch • Set the operation mode.
(SW1) (Normal operation mode, Installation mode, Mode operated by ROM, etc)
2)
Rotary function select 2 switch • Each switch setting is 0 to F.
(SW2) (Shipped from the factory in SW1 "0", SW2 "0" position)
• ON (Red) : The internal power (5VDC) is on.
3) POWER LED
• OFF : The internal power (5VDC) is off.
• Move to RUN/STOP
RUN : Motion SFC program is started.
STOP : Motion SFC program is stopped.
4) RUN/STOP/RESET switch
•RESET (Momentary switch)
Set the switch to the "RESET" position 1 second or more to reset the
hardware.
• For communication I/F with peripherals. (Ethernet connector)
• The upper LED of the connector for PERIPHERAL I/F.
Remains flashing : It communicates with the personal computer.
5) PERIPHERAL I/F connector OFF : It doesn't communicate with the personal computer.
•The lower LED of the PERIPHERAL I/F connector
ON : 100Mbps
OFF : 10Mbps
6) SSCNET connector (Note-1) Connector to connect the servo amplifier
• Incremental synchronous encoder input, the signal is input, the signal is output.
7) Internal I/F connector Incremental synchronous encoder input has Differential-output type,
Voltage-output/Open-collector type.
8) 24VDC power supply connector •The DC power of 24VDC is connected.
9) Serial number display plate •The serial number written on the rating plate is displayed.
10) Battery holder •Battery holder to set the Q6BAT/ Q7BAT
11) Hole for module fixing screw Screw used to fix to the control box. (M5 screw)
12) FG terminal (Terminal for earth) Earth terminal which is connected to shield patterns on the print circuit board.
(Note-1) : Refer to "2.5.4 SSCNET cable and connection" about a notification and a method of connection for
SSCNET .

2 - 10
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

(2) 7-segment LED display

The LED displays/flashes in the combination with errors.
Item 7-segment LED Remark
It takes about 10 seconds to initialize (RUN/STOP
display).
Execute the power cycle of the Motion controller
if the operation stopped at initializing. It may be
Start Initializing Motion controller's hardware fault when it is not
improved.
Explain the error symptom (LED display) and get
advice from our sales representative for the
modules with failure.

Normal " " remains flashing Normal operation

Steady "INS" display, Mode for installing operating system software via
Installation mode
" " remains flashing personal computer.
Mode for operating based on user programs and
Mode operated by
" " remains flashing parameters stored in the SRAM built-in Motion
RAM
controller.
Operation
Mode for operating after the user programs and
mode
Mode operated by Steady "INS" display, parameters stored in the FLASH ROM built-in
ROM " " remains flashing Motion controller are read to the SRAM built-in
Motion controller.

STOP Steady "STP" display Stopped the Motion SFC program.

RUN Steady "RUN" display Executed the Motion SFC program.

Early stage warning Displayed at battery voltage 2.7V or less.

Steady "BT1" display
Battery (2.7V or less) Refer to Section "6.5 External Battery".
error Final stage warning Displayed at battery voltage 2.5V or less.
Steady "BT2" display
(2.5V or less) Refer to Section "6.5 External Battery".

Operating system software Installation status mode when the operating system
"A00" remains flashing
not installed software is not installed.

" AL" flashes 3 times System setting error of the Motion controller Refer
System setting error to the "Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller
Steady " L01" display Programming Manual (COMMON)" for details.

Motion controller servo error.

Refer to the "Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion
" AL" flashes 3 times
controller (SV13/SV22) Programming Manual
Servo error
(REAL MODE)" or "Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU
Steady " S01" display
Motion controller (SV22) Programming Manual
(VIRTUAL MODE)" for details.
Hardware fault or software fault
Refer to the "Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion
controller (SV13/SV22) Programming Manual
WDT error Steady "..." display
(REAL MODE)" or "Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU
Motion controller (SV22) Programming Manual
(VIRTUAL MODE)" for details.

2 - 11
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

POINT
(1) When an error is displayed on the 7-segment LED, confirm the error number
etc. using MT Developer2.
(2) Refer to the Motion controller error batch monitor of MT Developer2 or error list
of the programming manual for error details.

(3) Rotary switch assignment

(a) Rotary function select switch 1 (SW1)
(Note)
Rotary switch Setting Mode Description

F0 1 0 Normal mode Normal operation mode

AB E
23
CD

4 56

789 When installing the operating system software

A Installation mode
using MT Developer2

(Note): Should not be set to anything except the above settings.

(b) Rotary function select switch 2 (SW2)

(Note)
Rotary switch Setting Mode Description
Normal operation mode
0 Mode operated by RAM (Operation by the setting data and parameters
stored in the Motion controller’s SRAM.)
F0 1 Mode to operate based on the setting data and
AB E
23
CD

4 56

6 Mode operated by ROM the parameters written to the Motion controller’s

789
FLASH ROM.
Ethernet IP address
8 Ethernet Internet Protocol address display mode.
display mode
C SRAM clear SRAM "0" clear
(Note): Not to be set except above setting.

CAUTION
Be sure to turn OFF the Motion controller power supply before the rotary switch setting
change.

2 - 12
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

(4) Operation mode

(a) Rotary switch setting and operation mode
(Note)
Rotary switch setting
Operation mode
SW1 SW2
A Any setting (Except C) Installation mode
0 0 Mode operated by RAM
0 6 Mode operated by ROM
0 8 Ethernet IP address display mode
(Note)
Any setting C SRAM clear
(Note) : The programs, parameters, absolute position data, and latch data built-in Motion
controller are cleared.

(b) Operation mode overview

Operation mode 7-segment LED Operation overview
• " . " remains flashing in the first digit of 7-segment LED.
Mode operated by
• Operates based on the user program and parameters stored in the SRAM of
RAM
the Motion controller.
• " . " remains flashing in the first digit and steady " . " display in the second
digit of 7-segment LED.
• Operation starts after the user programs and parameters stored in the Motion
controller’s FLASH ROM are read to the SRAM built-in Motion controller at
power supply on or reset of the Motion controller.
If the ROM writing is not executed, even if the user programs and
Mode operated by
parameters are changed using the MT Developer2 during mode operated by
ROM
ROM, operation starts with the contents of the FLASH ROM at next power
supply on or reset.
Also, If the ROM writing is not executed, even if the auto tuning data are
reflected on the servo parameter of the Motion controller by operation in the
auto-tuning setting, operation starts with the contents of the FLASH ROM at
next power on or reset.

Ethernet IP address • Refer to next page "(c) Ethernet IP address display mode overview".
-
display mode • Digital oscilloscope function cannot be used.

• " . " remains flashing in the first digit and steady.

• When rotary switch 2 is set to "C", and a power ON is done, the SRAM area
SRAM clear is cleared.
• The programs, parameters, absolute position data, and latch data in the
Motion controller are cleared.
• Steady "INS" display at the 7-segment LED.
• Operating system software can be installed.
Installation mode • STOP status is maintained regardless of the RUN/STOP/RESET switch
position on the front side of Motion controller.
• Digital oscilloscope function cannot be used.

2 - 13
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

(c) Ethernet IP address display mode overview

7-segment LED Operation overview

• IP address
Example(192.168.3.39)

• Subnet mask pattern

Example(255.255.255.0)

• Default router IP
address
Example(192.168.3.1)

&KUEQPPGEV
• Link status

%QPPGEV
/DRU (WNNFWRNGZ

%QPPGEV
/DRU *CNHFWRNGZ

(Note): When the Ethernet parameters are not written in the Motion controller , the
address are displayed as follows.
• IP address : 192.168.3.39
• Subnet mask pattern : 255.255.255.0
• Default router IP address : 192.168.3.1

POINT
Be sure to turn OFF the Motion controller power supply before a rotary switch
setting change.

2 - 14
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION


2.5.2 MR-MQ100 hardware and wiring

(1) Module specification

(a) Module specification

Item Specifications
(Note-1), (Note-2) 21.6 to 26.4VDC
Input voltage
24VDC (24VDC +/-10%, ripple ratio 5% or less)
power supply Inrush current (Note-3) 100A 1ms or less (at 24VDC input)
Max. input current 0.69A
Efficiency 80% (TYP.)
Input type connector
Power consumption 16.6W
Permissible instantaneous power off time
(Note-4), (Note-5) 10ms (at 24VDC input)

Mass 0.7kg
(Note-6)
178 (H) × 30(W) × 135(D)mm
Exterior dimensions
(7.01(H) × 1.18(W) × 5.31(D) )inch
Installation method It fixes directly to the control panel.

POINT
(Note-1) : Input power supply
MR-MQ100 is rated for use with a 24VDC input power supply only. The
MR-MQ100 unit breaks down when 28VDC or more is input.
(Note-2) : Select 24VDC power supply and electric wire within the range of
21.6 to 26.4VDC including any input ripple or spike voltage measured at
the input connector of the MR-MQ100.
(Note-3) : Inrush current
Take care that the inrush current of several amperes may flow when
the sharp square voltage is applied, or the power supply is turned ON
with the mechanical switch.
Turn on the primary(AC side) of power supply.
When selecting a fuse and breaker in the external circuit, take account of
the blow-out, detection characteristics and above points.
(Note-4) : Allowable momentary power failure period
(a) An instantaneous power failure lasting less than 10ms(Note) will cause
24VDC down to be detected, but operation will continue.
(b) An instantaneous power failure lasting in excess of 10ms(Note) may
cause the operation to continue or initial start to take place depending
on the power supply load.
(Note) : This is for a 24VDC input. This is 10ms or less for less than
24VDC.
(Note-5) : Select 24VDC power supply with allowable momentary power failure
period of 20ms or more .
(Note-6) : Exterior dimensions
The stated height (H) of the MR-MQ100 does include the battery holder
dimensions.
2 - 15
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

(b) Pin layout of the Internal I/F connector

Use the internal I/F connector on the front of the MR-MQ100 to connect to
manual pulse signals and incremental synchronous encoder signals.
The following is the pin layout of the MR-MQ100's internal I/F connector as
viewed from the front.

+PVGTPCN+(EQPPGEVQT
2+00Q 5KIPCNPCOG 2+00Q 5KIPCNPCOG
 5)  *$.

0QVG  5'.  *$*

0QVG
 5)  *#.
2KPNC[QWV  5)  *#*
QPVJGUKFGQH
 8  *$
RTKPVEKTEWKVDQCTF
0QVG
 8  *#
 0QEQPPGEV  0QEQPPGEV
 0QEQPPGEV  0QEQPPGEV
 0QEQPPGEV  0QEQPPGEV
   0QEQPPGEV  0QEQPPGEV
 0QEQPPGEV  0QEQPPGEV
 0QEQPPGEV  0QEQPPGEV

0QVG
0QVG
 0QEQPPGEV  0QEQPPGEV
 0QEQPPGEV  0QEQPPGEV
 0QEQPPGEV  0QEQPPGEV
 0QEQPPGEV  0QEQPPGEV
 0QEQPPGEV  0QEQPPGEV
 0QEQPPGEV  0QEQPPGEV

0QVG  %1/  %1/
0QVG
   &1  &1

0QVG  %1/  %1/
0QVG
 &+  &+
 &+  &+
 0QEQPPGEV  0QEQPPGEV

0QVG
0QVG
 0QEQPPGEV  0QEQPPGEV
Applicable connector model name
HDR type connector (HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO. LTD)
HDR-E50MSG1+ connector (Attachment)
HDR-E50LPH connector case
(Note-1) : Input type from manual pulse generator/ Incremental synchronous encoder
switched by SEL .
Not connected: Voltage-output/open-collector type.
SEL-SG connection : Differential -output type.
(Note-2) : Voltage-output/open-collector type
Connect the A-phase signal to HA, and the B-phase signal to HB.
(Note-3) : Differential-output type
Connect the A-phase signal to HAH, and the A-phase inverse signal HAL.
Connect the B-phase signal to HBH, and the B-phase inverse signal HBL.
(Note-4) : "COM1" is the common terminal of DI1, DI2, DI3 and DI4.
(Note-5) : "COM2" is the common terminal of DO1 and DO2.
(Note-6) : Do not connect to any of the terminal is explained as "No connect ".

2 - 16
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

(2) Input signal/ Mark detection

(a) Specifications of input signal/ mark detection input signal

Item Specifications
Number of input points 4 points
Input method Positive common/ Negative common shared
Isolation method Photo coupler
Rated input voltage 24VDC
Rated input current (IIN) Approx.5mA
21.6 to 26.4VDC
Operating voltage range
(24VDC +/ -10%, ripple ratio 5% or less)
ON voltage/current 17.5VDC or more/3.5mA or more
OFF voltage/current 5VDC or less/0.9mA or less
Input resistance Approx. 5.6k
OFF to ON
Response time 1ms or less
ON to OFF
Common terminal arrangement 4 points/common(Common contact: COM1)
Indicates to display None

(b) Interface of input signal/ mark detection input signal

+PRWVQT 2KP0Q 9KTKPI +PVGTPCN

5KIPCNPCOG &GUETKRVKQP
QWVRWV &+ &+ &+ &+ GZCORNG EKTEWKV

5KIPCNKPRWV
+PRWV &+‫غ‬     /CTMFGVGEVKQP
/CTM 0QVG UKIPCNKPRWV
+PRWV
FGVGEVKQP
 㧗㧙
KPRWV %1/
 8&% 0QVG

(Note-1) : =1 to 4
(Note-2) : Both "positive common" and "negative common" can be used.

2 - 17
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

(3) Output signal

(a) Specification of output signal

Item Specifications
Number of output points 2 points
Output method Sink/Source type
Isolation method Photo coupler
Rated load voltage 24VDC +/ -10%
Maximum load current (lout) 40mA/point, 80mA/common
21.6 to 26.4VDC
External supply power
(24VDC +/ -10%, ripple ratio 5% or less)
Maximum voltage drop at ON (Vdorp) 2.75VDC or less
OFF voltage/ current 11VDC or less/ 1.7mA or less
Input resistance Approx. 5.6k
OFF to ON 1ms or less
Response time
ON to OFF 1ms or less(Rated load, resistance load)
Common terminal arrangement 2 points/common(Common contact: COM2)
Indicates to display None

(b) Interface of output signal

+PRWVQT 2KP0Q 9KTKPI

5KIPCNPCOG +PVGTPCNEKTEWKV &GUETKRVKQP
QWVRWV &1 &1 GZCORNG

5KIPCNQWVRWV
&‫غ‬   .QCF
0QVG
1WVRWV 1WVRWV

%1/  8&% 0QVG

(Note-1) : = 1 to 2
(Note-2) : Both "sink type" and "source type" can be used.

2 - 18
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

(4) Manual pulse generator/ Incremental synchronous encoder input

(a) Specification of manual pulse generator/ Incremental
synchronous encoder

Item Specifications
Signal input form Phase A/ Phase B
1Mpps
Maximum input pulse frequency
(After magnification by 4, up to 4Mpps)
Pulse width 1 μs or more
Leading edge/trailing edge time 0.25μs or less
Phase difference 0.25μs or more
High-voltage 2.0 to 5.25 VDC
Low-voltage 0 to 0.8 VDC
Differential-output Differential voltage -0.2 to 0.2 V
type Adjustment type Differential-output type(26LS31 or equivalent)
(26LS31 or Cable length 30m (98.43ft.)
equivaient)
㪈㱘㫊
㪇㪅㪌㱘㫊 㪇㪅㪌㱘㫊

㪧㪿㪸㫊㪼㩷㪘 㪇㪅㪉㪌㱘㫊
Example of waveform
㪧㪿㪸㫊㪼㩷㪙
㪇㪅㪉㪌㱘㫊 㪇㪅㪉㪌㱘㫊
㪛㫌㫋㫐㩷㫉㪸㫋㫀㫆㩷㪌㪇㩼

200kpps
Maximum input pulse frequency
(After magnification by 4, up to 800kpps)
Pulse width 5μs or more
Leading edge/trailing edge time 1.2μs or less
Phase difference 1.2μs or more
High-voltage 3.0 to 5.25 VDC
Low-voltage 0 to 1 VDC
Adjustment type Voltage-output/ Open-collector type(5VDC)
Voltage-output/
Cable length 10m (32.8ft.)
Open-collector type
㪌㱘㫊
㪉㪅㪌㱘㫊 㪉㪅㪌㱘㫊

㪧㪿㪸㫊㪼㩷㪘 㪈㪅㪉㱘㫊
Example of waveform
㪧㪿㪸㫊㪼㩷㪙
㪈㪅㪉㱘㫊 㪈㪅㪉㱘㫊
㪛㫌㫋㫐㩷㫉㪸㫋㫀㫆㩷㪌㪇㩼

POINT
Use a manual pulse generator or an incremental synchronous encoder that
consumes less than 0.2[A] of current.
2 - 19
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

(b) Interface between Manual pulse generator (Differential-output

type)/ Incremental synchronous encoder

Input or
Signal name Pin No. Wiring example Internal circuit Specification Description
Output
Rated input voltage For connection
Manual A 22 5.5VDC or less
A manual pulse
pulse HAH
generator
generator, A HIGH level
A Phases A, B
phase A 23 2.0 to 5.25VDC
HAL Manual pulse Pulse width
generator/ 1 s or more
INC
B synchronous LOW level
Manual 24 0.5 s 0.5 s
Input encoder 0.8VDC or less or more or more
pulse HBH B
(Duty ratio: 50% 25%)
generator,
B 26LS31 or Leading edge, Trailing
phase B B
25 equivalent edge time 0.25 s or less.
HBL
Phase difference

Phase A
Select type
(Note-2) Phase B
signal 49 0.25 s or
more
SEL (1) Address increases
if Phase A leads
Phase B.
(Note-1) 45 Power supply (2) Address decreases
5V 5VDC if Phase B leads
5V Phase A.
46
Power
supply SG
47
SG 48
50

(Note-1) : The 5VDC power supply from the MR-MQ100 must not be used if a separate power supply
is applied to the Manual pulse generator/ incremental synchronous encoder.
If a separate power supply is used, be sure it is 5V voltage. Anything else may cause a
failure.
(Note-2) : Connect SEL to the SG terminal if the manual pulse generator (differential-output type)/
incremental synchronous encoder is used.

2 - 20
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

(c) Interface between Manual pulse generator (Voltage-output/

Open-collector type)/ Incremental synchronous encoder

Input or Pin No. Wiring example Internal circuit

Signal name Specification Description
Output
Manual Rated input voltage For connection
pulse A 5.5VDC or less manual pulse
generator, 20 generator
HIGH level Phases A, B
phase A 3 to 5.25VDC/
Manual pulse Pulse width
HA generator/
2mA or less 5 s or more

Incremental
Manual synchronous LOW level 2.5 s 2.5 s
Input pulse encoder B 1VDC or less/ or more or more

(Duty ratio: 50% 25%)

generator, 5mA or more
21 Leading edge, Trailing
phase B edge time 1.2 s or less.
Phase difference
HB
Phase A
Select type Phase B
2.5 s or
signal 49
No connect more
(1) Address increases
SEL
if Phase A leads
Phase B.
(2) Address decreases
(Note) if Phase B leads
5V 45 Power supply
Phase A.
46 5V 5VDC
Power
supply 47
SG

SG 48
50

(Note) : The 5VDC power supply from the MR-MQ100 must not be used if a separate power supply is
applied to the Manual pulse generator/ incremental synchronous encoder.
If a separate power supply is used, be sure it is 5V voltage. Anything else may cause a failure.

2 - 21
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

(d) Connection examples of manual pulse generator/ incremental

synchronous encoder

Differential-output type Voltage-output/ Open-collector type

/CPWCNRWNUG /CPWCNRWNUG
IGPGTCVQTUKFG IGPGTCVQTUKFG
/4/3 +PETGOGPVCNU[PEJTQPQWU /4/3 +PETGOGPVCNU[PEJTQPQWU
GPEQFGTUKFG GPEQFGTUKFG
5KIPCNPCOG 5KIPCNPCOG
*#* # *# #
*#. # *$ $
*$* $ 5) 8
*$. $ 5) 8
5) 8 5)
0QVG
8 8 8
5)
0QVG 5'.

0QVG
5JKGNF
5'. ()
5JGNN
6YKUVRCKTECDNG
()
5JGNN 5JKGNF
6YKUVRCKTECDNG

(Note-1) : The 5VDC power supply from the MR-MQ100 must not be used if a separate power supply is applied to the Manual
pulse generator/ incremental synchronous encoder.
If a separate power supply is used, be sure it is 5V stabilized. Anything else may cause a failure.
(Note-2) : Input type from manual pulse generator/incremental synchronous encoder switched by SEL.
Not connected: Voltage-output/open-collector type
SEL-SG connection: Difference-output type

CAUTION
If a separate power supply is used as the manual pulse generator/incremental synchronous
encoder power supply, use a 5V stabilized power supply. Any other power supply may cause a
failure.
Wiring during power-on may damage the unit. Power off the unit, before wiring.
Miss wiring may cause damage to the unit. Ensure care during wiring.

(5) PERIPHERAL I/F

Item Specifications
Data transmission speed 100/10Mbps
Communication mode Full-duplex/ Half-duplex
Transmission
Transmission method Base band
Cable length [m(ft)] Up to 30 (98.43)

2 - 22
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.5.3 24VDC power supply connector

(1) Connecting of 24VDC power supply connector

(a) Pin layout of the 24VDC power supply connector

MR-MQ100 requires 24VDC. The pins layout (from front view) of the
24VDC connector is shown below.

8


)

(b) DC24V power supply cable

Connect 24V(+) to the 24VDC power supply connector as shown in the

table below.

Pin No. Signal Name

1B 24V(+)
2B 24G

• Applicable connector model name

24VDC power supply connector set (Q170MPWCON) (Attachment)
1-1827864-2 connector (Tyco Electronics AMP K.K. make)
1827587-2 terminal
• Conductor size for power supply wiring
0.34 to 0.37 mm2 (AWG22)

2 - 23
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

CAUTION
24V(+) pin is upper side and 24G pin is lower side of 24VDC connector of MR-MQ100. If the
polarity is wrong, the unit may be damaged.
Recommend the use of twisted pair cabling for 24VDC input.
Power off the unit before wiring 24VDC input.
Use proper size wire for 24VDC.
Do not connect to pins "1A" or "2A" of the 24VDC power input connector.

2 - 24
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.5.4 SSCNET cables and connection method

This section describes how to connect between the Motion controller and servo
amplifier.
SSCNET cabling is used between the Motion controller and servo amplifier.

(1) Connection between the MR-MQ100 and servo amplifier

PULL

55%0'6ΥECDNGNGPIVJ
㨯/4,$75‫غ‬/WUG
%0 ‫ޓ‬Ԙ҇O
HV
㨯/4,$75‫غ‬/#WUG
‫ޓ‬Ԙ҇O
HV
㨯/4,$75‫غ‬/$WUG
‫ޓ‬Ԙ҇O
HV

Ԙ %0#

%CR
%0$

5GTXQCORNKHKGT
(Note): Communication will not be possible if CN1A and CN1B are mistaken for one-another.

List of SSCNET cable model name

Model name
(Note)
Cable length Description

0.15m(0.49ft.), 0.3m(0.98ft.), 0.5m(1.64ft.), Standard cord for

MR-J3BUS M
1m(3.28ft.), 3m(9.84ft.) inside panel

Standard cable for • MR-MQ100 MR-J3- B

MR-J3BUS M-A 5m(16.4ft.), 10m(32.81ft.), 20m(65.62ft.)
outside panel

MR-J3BUS M-B 30m(98.43ft.), 40m(131.23ft.), 50m(164.04ft.) Long distance cable

(Note) : =cable length

2 - 25
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

POINT
(1) Be sure to connect SSCNET cable as per above. If the connection is
incorrect, communication between the Motion controller and servo amplifier is
not possible.

(2) The SSCNET connector has a cap to protect the optical device inside from
dust. For this reason, do not remove the cap until just before connecting the
SSCNET cable. Also, when removing the SSCNET cable, be sure to put
the cap back on.

(3) Be sure to keep the SSCNET fiber optic protective cap and tubing in a
sealed plastic bag to prevent them from becoming dirty.

(4) Do not remove the SSCNET cable while the power supply of the Motion
controller or servo amplifier is turned on.
Do not look directly into the light generated from SSCNET connector of the
Motion controller, servo amplifier or from the end of SSCNET cable. The light
can damage the eye. (The light source of SSCNET cable complies with
class1 defined in JISC6802 or IEC60825-1.)

(5) When replacing the servo amplifier or the Motion controller, be sure to put a
cap on the SSCNET connector. When sending a servo amplifier or Motion
controller back for repairs, also be sure to put a cap on the SSCNET
connector. Without a cap, the light device may be damaged during transit. If
this is the exchange or repair of the light device will be required.

(2) Cable specifications

(a) MR-J3BUS M
Model name
MR-J3BUS015M MR-J3BUS03M MR-J3BUS05M MR-J3BUS1M MR-J3BUS3M
Item
Cable length [m(ft.)] 0.15(0.49) 0.3(0.98) 0.5(1.64) 1(3.28) 3(9.84)

(b) MR-J3BUS M-A

Model name
MR-J3BUS5M-A MR-J3BUS10M-A MR-J3BUS20M-A
Item
Cable length [m(ft.)] 5(16.40) 10(32.81) 20(65.62)

(c) MR-J3BUS M-B

Model name
MR-J3BUS30M-B MR-J3BUS40M-B MR-J3BUS50M-B
Item
Cable length [m(ft.)] 30(98.43) 40(131.23) 50(164.04)

2 - 26
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

(3) Setting of the axis No. and axis select rotary switch of servo
amplifier
Axis No. is used in the program to set the axis numbers of any servo amplifiers
connected to the motion controller via SSCNET .
Set the axis select rotary switch of the servo amplifier to "0", because the axis
number is fixed in the "system structure" display as "d01".
(The default setting of the axis select rotary switch of servo amplifier is "0".)

• System structure (Allocation of axis No.) • Axis select rotary switch

(Servo amplifier)

7 8 9

3 4 5 6

A
B C DE
2
F 0 1

Set the servo amplifier’s

rotary switch to "0".

The axis number "d01"

is fixed on the "system
structure" display.

2 - 27
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.5.5 Battery

Below explains the specification, install procedure and handling of the Motion controller
battery.

(1) Battery specifications

Model name
Q6BAT Q7BAT
Item
Classification Manganese dioxide lithium primary battery
Initial voltage [V] 3.0
Nominal current [mAh] 1800 5000
Storage life 5 years typical (Room temperature) 5 years typical (Room temperature)
Lithium content [g] 0.49 1.52
Applications For memory data backup of SRAM built-in Motion controller
Exterior dimensions [mm(inch)] 16(0.63)˜32(1.26) 24(0.94)˜52(2.05)
(Note) : The following points are changed for lithium metal batteries transportation by sea
or air due to Recommendations of the United Nations Rev. 15 and ICAO-TI 2009-
2010 edition.
1) A package containing 24 cells or 12 batteries or less that are not contained in
equipment are no longer exempt from the following: attachment of a handling
label,
submission of the Shipper's Declaration for Dangerous Goods, and a 1.2m drop
test.
2) A battery handling label (size: 120 x 110mm) is required. Emergency telephone
number must be filled out in the additional handling information of the Shipper's
Declaration for Dangerous Goods.
3) New label design containing battery illustration must be used (in air
transportation only).

CAUTION!

IF DAMAGED

Lithium Metal batteries

DO NOT LOAD OR TRANSPORT
PACKAGE IF DAMAGED
For more information,call
+81-3-3218-3639
International

Fig.2.1 Example of Label with Battery llustration

• Transportation precaution for customers

Documentations like the handling label in the specified design and the Shipper's
Declaration for Dangerous Goods are required for air and sea transportation.
Please attach documentations like the handling label in the specified design and
the Shipper's Declaration for Dangerous Goods to the package.

If you need the self-certification form for the battery safety test, contact Mitsubishi.
For more information, contact Mitsubishi.

2 - 28
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

(2) Data back-up of the Motion controller by the battery

Be sure to set the battery to the Motion controller.
Set the battery (Q6BAT/Q7BAT) to battery holder.
The data (Refer to Section 6.5.) of RAM built-in Motion controller are backed up
without using the battery.
In the following status, the backup time after power OFF is 3 minutes.
• The Q6BAT/Q7BAT lead connector is disconnected.
• The lead wire of Q6BAT/Q7BAT is broken.

(Note-1)
Battery life (Total power failure time) [h]
Actual service value
Guaranteed value Guaranteed value
Battery type Power-on time (Note-5)
(Note-3) (Note-4) Backup time after alarm
ratio (Note-2) (Reference value)
(MIN) (75°C (167°F)) (TYP) (40°C (104°F))
(TYP) (25°C (77°F))
0% 20000
30% 27000
Battery 90
50% 31000 43800 43800
(Q6BAT) (After SM51,SM52 ON)
70% 36000
100% 43800
0% 39000
Large
30%
capacity 90
50% 43800 43800
battery 43800 (After SM51,SM52 ON)
70%
(Q7BAT)
100%

(Note-1) : The actual service value indicates the average value, and the guaranteed time indicates the minimum time.
(Note-2) : The power-on time ratio indicates the ratio of Motion controller power-on time to one day (24 hours).
17
Power-on time ratio u 100 70[%]
24
(When the total power-on time is 17 hours and the total power-off time is 7 hours, the power-on time ratio is 70%.)
(Note-3) : The guaranteed value (MIN) ; equivalent to the total power failure time that is calculated based on the characteristics value of
the memory (SRAM) supplied by the manufacturer and under the storage ambient temperature range of -25°C to 75°C (-13 to
167°F) (operating ambient temperature of 0°C to 55°C (32 to 131°F)).
(Note-4) : The guaranteed value (TYP) ; equivalent to the total power failure time that is calculated based on the normal air-conditioned
environment (40°C (104°F)).
(Note-5) : The actual service value (Reference value) ; equivalent to the total power failure time that is calculated based on the measured
value and under the storage ambient temperature of 25°C (77°F). This value is intended for reference only, as it varies with
characteristics of the memory.

POINT
The self-discharge influences the life of battery without the connection to Motion
controller. The battery should be exchanged approximately every 4 or 5 years.
And, exchange the battery with a new one every 4 to 5 years even if the total
power failure time is equal to or less than the guaranteed value.

2 - 29
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

CAUTION
Do not short a battery.
Do not charge a battery.
Do not disassemble a battery.
Do not burn a battery.
Do not overheat a battery.
Do not solder the battery terminal.
The data (Refer to Section 6.5.) of RAM built-in Motion controller are backed up without
using the battery.

2 - 30
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

(3) Motion Controller connection procedure

(a) Connection of the battery connector
Connect the battery connector first, then store the connector and lead wire
into the battery holder.

PUSH

(b) Install the battery holder to the motion controller.

$GUWTGVJCVVJGDCVVGT[ UNGCF
YKTGKUEQPVCKPGFEQORNGVGN[
KPUKFGVJGDCVVGT[JQNFGT

2 - 31
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

(3) Handling the battery lead wire

(a) Precautions for handling the battery lead wire
• Be sure to securely hold the battery lead wire connector while connecting
or removing the battery connection.

Battery lead connector Do not hold lead wire

PUSH

(b) Connection of the battery lead wire

• Hold the battery lead connector and connect it securely to the battery
connector of the Motion controller. Be sure to insert it until it clicks.

(c) Removal of the battery lead wire from battery case

• Remove the battery lead wire from battery case by pulling it out while
holding the battery lead connector.

(d) Detaching of the battery connector

• Please remove the battery connector by pulling on the connector hook in
the manner shown below.
• Do not pull on the lead wire itself.
㪟㫆㫆㫂

㪉㪀

㪈㪀

1) Pull forward.
2) Pull up.

POINT
(1) Forcible removal of the battery lead wire from the connector will damage the
battery connector or battery lead wire.
(2) The programs, parameters, absolute position data, and latch data of the
Motion controller’s SRAM are not backed up if the battery connector is not
properly connected.

2 - 32
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.5.6 Software specification of MR-MQ100

(1) Motion control specifications

Item Specifications
Number of control axes 1 axis
Operation cycle (default) 0.44ms/ 1 axis
Interpolation functions None
PTP(Point to Point) control, Speed control, Speed-position control (Note-3),
Fixed-pitch feed, Constant speed control, Position follow-up control,
Control modes
Speed control with fixed position stop, Speed switching control,
High-speed oscillation control, Synchronous control
Acceleration/ Automatic trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration,
deceleration control S-curve acceleration/deceleration
Compensation Backlash compensation, Electronic gear, Phase compensation
Programming language Motion SFC, Dedicated instruction, Mechanical support language
Servo program capacity 16k steps
Number of positioning 3200 points
points (Positioning data can be designated indirectly)
Peripheral I/F PERIPHERAL I/F
Proximity dog type (2 types), Count type (3 types), Data set type (2 types),
Home position return function Dog cradle type, Stopper type (2 types), Limit switch combined type
(Home position return re-try function provided, home position shift function provided)
JOG operation function Provided
Manual pulse generator
Possible to connect 1 modules(Note-2)
operation function
Synchronous encoder operation
Possible to connect 1 modules ( incremental only) (Note-2)
function
M-code output function provided
M-code function
M-code completion wait function provided
Number of output points 32 points
Limit switch output function
Watch data: Motion control data/Word device
ROM operation function Provided
Made compatible by setting battery to servo amplifier.
Absolute position system
(Possible to select the absolute data method or incremental method for each axis)
Number of SSCNET systems
(Note-1) 1 system

Motion related interface module None

External input signal The input signal of the servo amplifier is used.(FLS,RLS,DOG)
High-speed reading of Provided
Specified Data (Via internal I/F input module)
Number of I/O points Input points 4 points/ Output points 2 points
Mark detection function Provided

2 - 33
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

Motion control specifications (continued)

Item Specifications
Clock Function Provided
"Write Protection" or "Read/Write Protection" can be set for "Motion SFC program",
Security function
"Servo program", "Mechanical system program" and "CAM data".
All clear function Provided
Remote Operation Remote RUN/STOP, Remote latch clear
Digital Oscilloscope function Provided
Mixed Function of Virtual Mode/
None
Real Mode
(Note-1) : Only SSCNET based MR-J3 series servo amplifier can be used.
(Note-2) : Either a "Manual pulse generator" or "Incremental synchronous encoder" can be used.
(Note-3) : "CHANGE" signal of Speed-position control comes from the servo amplifier .

2 - 34
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

(2) Motion SFC performance specifications

Item Specifications
Code total
(Motion SFC chart + Operation control 543k bytes
Motion SFC program
+ Transition)
capacity
Text total
484k bytes
(Operation control + Transition)
Number of Motion SFC programs 256 (No.0 to 255)
Motion SFC chart size/program Up to 64k bytes (Included Motion SFC chart comments)
Number of Motion SFC steps/program Up to 4094 steps
Motion SFC program
Number of selective branches/branch 255
Number of parallel branches/branch 255
Parallel branch nesting Up to 4 levels
4096 with F(Once execution type) and FS(Scan execution type)
Number of operation control programs
combined. (F/FS0 to F/FS4095)
Number of transition programs 4096(G0 to G4095)
Operation control program Code size/program Up to approx. 64k bytes (32766 steps)
(F/FS) Number of blocks(line)/program Up to 8192 blocks (in the case of 4 steps(min)/blocks)
/ Number of characters/block Up to 128 (comment included)
Transition program Number of operand/block Up to 64 (operand: constants, word device, bit devices)
(G) ( ) nesting/block Up to 32 levels
Operation control program Calculation expression/bit conditional expression
Descriptive
Calculation expression/bit conditional expression/
expression Transition program
comparison conditional expression
Number of multi execute programs Up to 256
Number of multi active steps Up to 256 steps/all programs
Normal task Execute in main cycle of Motion controller
Execute specification Event task
Executed
(Execution Execute in fixed cycle
task Fixed cycle
can be (0.44ms, 0.88ms, 1.77ms, 3.55ms, 7.11ms, 14.2ms)
masked.)
I/O (X,Y) points 8192 points
I/O (PX, PY) points Internal I/F (Input 4 points, Output 2 points)
internal relays (M) 12288 points
Link relays (B) 8192 points
Annunciators relays (F) 2048 points
Number of devices
Special relays (SM) 2256 points
(Devices in the Motion
Data registers (D) 8192 points
controller only)
Link registers (W) 8192 points
(Positioning dedicated
Special registers (SD) 2256 points
devices are included)
Motion registers (#) 12288 points
Coasting timers (FT) 1 point (888μs)
Multiple CPU area device None

2 - 35
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

(3) Mechanical system program specifications

Item Specifications

Number of control axes 1 axis

Synchronous control, PTP (Point to Point) control, speed control, fixed-pitch feed,
Control method
constant-speed control, position follow-up control, speed-switching control
Virtual servomotor
Drive module PLS
Synchronous encoder
Roller
mm, inch
Control units Ball screw
Output module
Rotary table Fixed as "degree"
Cam mm, inch, PLS
Program language Dedicated instructions (Servo program + mechanical system program)
(Note-1)
Capacity 16k steps (14334 steps)
Servo program Number of
Total of 3200 points (It changes with programs, indirect specification is possible.)
positioning points
Number of modules which can be set per CPU
Virtual module 3 axes
Drive
Synchronous
modules 1 axis
encoder
Main shaft 1
Virtual
Mechanical system program

Auxiliary input
axes 1
axis
Gear 2
Clutch 2
Trans- Speed change
2
mission gear
modules Differential gear 1
Differential gear
1
to main shaft
Roller 1
Output Ball screw 1
Total of 1
modules Rotary table 1
Cam 1
(Note-2)
Types Up to 256
(Note-2)
Resolution per cycle 256 • 512 • 1024 • 2048
Memory capacity 132k bytes
Cam

Storage memory for cam data CPU internal RAM memory

Stroke resolution 32767
Control mode Two-way cam/feed cam

2 - 36
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

(3) Mechanical system program specifications (Continued)

Item Specifications

PTP (Point to Point) control, speed control, fixed-pitch feed, constant-speed control,
Control methods
position follow-up control
PTP control : Selection of absolute or incremental data method
Fixed-pitch feed : Incremental data method
Method
Constant-speed control : Both absolute and incremental data method can be used together
Positioning
Position follow-up control : Absolute data method
Position command Address setting range : –2147483648 to 2147483647 [PLS]
Speed command Speed setting range : 1 to 2147483647 [PLS/s]
Virtual servomotor

Automatic
Acceleration-fixed acceleration/deceleration Time-fixed acceleration/deceleration
trapezoidal
Acceleration time : 1 to 65535 [ms] Acceleration/deceleration time:1 to 5000 [ms]
Acceleration/ acceleration/
Deceleration time : 1 to 65535 [ms] (Only constant-speed control is possible.)
deceleration deceleration
control
S-curve
acceleration/ S-curve ratio : 0 to 100[%]
deceleration
JOG operation function Provided
M-function (with mode) M-code output function provided, M-code complete wait function provided
Manual pulse generator operation 1 unit can be connected.
function Setting of magnification : 1 to 10000
(Test mode only) Setting of smoothing magnification provided.
(Note-1) : Capacity matching the servo program for real mode.
(Note-2) : Relation between a resolution per cycle of cam and type are shown below.
Resolution per cycle 256 512 1024 2048

Type 256 128 64 32

2 - 37
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

MEMO

2 - 38
3 DESIGN

3. DESIGN

3.1 System Design Procedure

Design a system which uses the Motion controller using the following procedure.

Motion control system design

Check the below items,based on the control mode and the servo
external signal.
When there is mechanical home position and home position return is
made: Proximity dog required 3
For speed control: Speed-position switching control signal required
When overrun prevention is necessary: Stroke limit required

Select the servo amplifier and servo motor according to the motor Refer to the servo
capacity and number of revolution from the machine mechanism to be amplifier manual.
controlled.

Refer to section 3.2

External circuit design

Power supply circuit design

Refer to section 3.2.1

Design the power supply circuit which supplies power to such system
components as the Motion controller, I/O equipment and servo
amplifiers, etc., taking into consideration the protective coordination
and noise suppression techniques.

Safety circuit design

Refer to section 3.2.2

Design the operation-ready circuit which stops the system at
occurrence of any alarm such as a Motion controller or servo amplifier
alarm or the emergency stop, the circuit which avoids a malfunction
while power is unstable at power-on, and the electromagnetic brake
circuit for servomotors.

Layout design within control panel

Refer to section 3.3

Layout design based on the design environment such as temperatures
and vibrations in consideration of heat generated from modules and
handling of module installation.

3-1
3 DESIGN

CAUTION
Provide appropriate circuits external to the Motion controller to prevent cases where danger
may result from abnormal operation of the overall system in the event of an external power
supply fault or the Motion controller failure.
Mount the Motion controller, servo amplifier, servomotor and regenerative resistor on
incombustible material. Mounting them directly or close to combustibles will lead to fire.
If a fault occurs in the Motion controller or servo amplifier, shut the power OFF at the servo
amplifier’s power source. If a large current continues to flow, fire may occur.
When using a regenerative resistor, shut the power OFF with an error signal. The regenerative
resistor may abnormally overheat due to a fault in the regenerative transistor, etc., and may
lead to fire.
Always take heat measures such as flame proofing for the inside of the control panel where the
servo amplifier or regenerative resistor is mounted and for the wires used. Failing to do so may
lead to fire.
Do not apply a voltage other than that specified in the instruction manual on any terminal.
Doing so may lead to destruction or damage.
Do not mistake the polarity ( + / - ), as this may lead to destruction or damage.

3-2
3 DESIGN

CAUTION
Do not touch the heat radiating fins of controller or servo amplifier, regenerative resistor and
servomotor, etc. while the power is ON and for a short time after the power is turned OFF. In
this timing, these parts become very hot and may lead to burns.
Always turn the power OFF before touching the servomotor shaft or coupled machines, as
these parts may lead to injuries.
Do not go near the machine during test operations or during operations such as teaching.
Doing so may lead to injuries.
Always mount a leakage breaker on the Motion controller and servo amplifier power source.
If mounting of an electromagnetic contactor for power shut off during an error, etc., is specified
in the instruction manual for the servo amplifier, etc., always mount the electromagnetic
contactor.
Mount an emergency stop circuit externally so that the operation can be stopped immediately
and the power shut off.
Use the Motion controller, servo amplifier, servomotor and regenerative resistor with the correct
combinations listed in the instruction manual. Other combinations may lead to fire or faults.
If safety standards (ex., robot safety rules, etc.,) apply to the system using the Motion controller,
servo amplifier and servomotor, make sure that the safety standards are satisfied.
Construct a safety circuit externally of the Motion controller or servo amplifier if the abnormal
operation of the Motion controller or servo amplifier differ from the safety directive operation in
the system.
In systems where coasting of the servomotor will be a problem during the forced stop, the
emergency stop, servo OFF or when the power is shut OFF, use dynamic brakes.
Make sure that the system considers the coasting amount even when using dynamic brakes.
In systems where perpendicular shaft dropping may be a problem during the forced stop, the
emergency stop, servo OFF or when the power is shut OFF, use both dynamic brakes and
electromagnetic brakes.
The dynamic brakes must be used only during the forced stop, the emergency stop and errors
where servo OFF occurs. These brakes must not be used for normal braking.
The brakes (electromagnetic brakes) assembled into the servomotor are for holding
applications, and must not be used for normal braking.
The system must have a mechanical allowance so that the machine itself can stop even if the
stroke limits switch is passed through at the max. speed.
Use wires and cables that have a wire diameter, heat resistance and bending resistance
compatible with the system.
Use wires and cables within the length of the range described in the instruction manual.
The ratings and characteristics of the parts (other than Motion controller, servo amplifier,
servomotor) used in a system must be compatible with the Motion controller, servo amplifier
and servomotor.
Install a cover on the shaft so that the rotary parts of the servomotor are not touched during
operation.
There may be some cases where holding by the electromagnetic brakes is not possible due to
the life or mechanical structure (when the ball screw and servomotor are connected with a
timing belt, etc.). Mount a stopping device to ensure safety on the machine side.

3-3
3 DESIGN

3.2 External Circuit Design

This section explains methods and instructions for designing the power supply circuits
and safety circuits, etc.
(1) Sample system circuit design for Motion controller

RJCUG PULL

#%8

'.$

4 5 6
5GTXQPQTOCNQWVRWV
8&%
5GTXQPQTOCN0 㪪㪪㪚㪥㪜㪫㸉
KPVGTHCEG #NCTO1(( 0QVG
RQYGTUWRRN[
%2
8&% 8 2;O
4C
RQYGT
UWRRN[ 8)

EQO

8&% 8
RQYGTUWRRN[ )
HQT/4/3
%2
8&% 8
RQYGT
UWRRN[ 8)
()

8&%
RQYGTUWRRN[
%2 HQTGNGEVTQOCIPGVKEDTCMG
8&% 㧗8
RQYGT
UWRRN[ )

1RGTCVKQP 1RGTCVKQP
TGCF[ TGCF[
1(( 10
%2 4C
/%
/%
5-

3-4
3 DESIGN

POINT
<Example> For control axis 1
(1) (Note-1) : Motion SFC program example is shown in the right record.
(2) (Note-2) : It is also possible to use a full wave rectified power supply as the Servo error detection
power supply for the electromagnetic brake.
(3) (Note-3) : It is also possible to use forced stop signal of the servo amplifier. [F 1]
SET PYm PYm ON with initial
(4) (Note-4) : It is recommended to use one leakage breaker for one servo (ON : normal)
amplifier. [G 1]
When electric power is supplied to multiple servo amplifiers for one M2408 Servo error detection
of the axis 1
leakage breaker, select the wire connected to the servo amplifier
[F 2]
according to the capacity of the leakage breaker. RST PYm OFF : abnormal (error)

END

(Note-5) : Be sure to shut off both the main circuit power supply L1/L2/L3 and control power supply L11/L21 at the time of exchange of
servo amplifier. At this time, it is not possible to communicate between the servo amplifier and Motion controller. Therefore, be
sure to exchange the servo amplifier after stopping the operating of machine beforehand.

'.$QT0($ 0QVG
7
. /4,$ 7
8
. 8 5/
9 4C
. 9
2'
. 'NGEVTQ
)TQWPF
. OCIPGVKE
&+%1/
DTCMG
%0# #./ 4C  0QVG

%0$ '/ 8

&1%1/ )
0QVG

/%

3-5
3 DESIGN

3.2.1 Power supply circuit design

This section describes the protective coordination and noise suppression techniques of
the power supply circuit.
(1) Separation and protective coordination (leakage current protection,
over current protection) of power supply lines
Separate the lines for Motion controller power supplies from the lines for I/O
devices and servo amplifiers as shown below.
When there is much noise, connect an insulation transformer.
The Motion controller may malfunction as it is affected by various noises such
as electric path noises from the power supply systems, and electromagnetic
noises from conductors. To avoid such troubles, set the 24VDC power supply
according to application.
When there is much leakage current, connect a leakage current breaker.

Motion
controller Insulation
Main power power transformer
supply supply
24VDC Motion
100/200VAC
CP power controller
NFB or ELB
supply
I/O power T1
supply
24VDC
I/O devices
CP power
Main supply
power supply
Main circuit device
CP
Main circuit power supply
for servo amplifier
100/200/400VAC
NFB or ELB MC
Servo amplifier
Control power supply
for servo amplifier

3-6
3 DESIGN

(2) Grounding
Without proper grounding, the Motion controller may malfunction as it is affected
by various noises such as electric path noises from the power supply systems,
radiated and induced noises from other equipment, servo amplifiers and their
cables, and electromagnetic noises from conductors. To avoid such troubles,
connect the earthing ground of each equipment and the shield grounds of the
shielded cables to the earth.
For grounding, use the exclusive ground terminal wire of each equipment or a
single-point earth method to avoid grounding by common wiring, where possible,
since noise interference may occur from other equipment due to common
impedances.

NKPGPQKUG 8&%
8#% RQYGTUWRRN[ /QVKQPEQPVTQNNGT
HKNVGT

55%0'6

5GTXQ
5GTXQCORNKHKGT OQVQT

(Note): Be sure to ground the line noise filter, Motion controller, servo amplifier and
servomotor. (Ground resistance : 100 or less)

3-7
3 DESIGN

3.2.2 Safety circuit design

(1) Concept of safety circuits

When the Motion controller is powered on and off, normal control output may
momentarily not be possible due to a delay or startup time difference between
the Motion controller power supply and the external power supply (DC in
particular) for the control target.
Also, abnormal operation may occur if an external power supply fault or Motion
controller failure takes place.
To prevent any of these abnormal operations from leading to the abnormal
operation of the whole system, areas which can result in machine breakdown
and accidents due to abnormal operations (e.g. emergency stop, protective and
interlock circuits) should be constructed outside the Motion controller in a fail-safe
method.

(2) Emergency stop circuit

The circuit should be constructed outside of the Motion controller or servo
amplifier. Shutting off the power supply to the external servo amplifier using this
circuit should turn on the electromagnetic brakes of the servomotor.

(3) Forced stop circuit

It is also possible to use the forced stop signal of the servo amplifier.
Refer to manual of the servo amplifier for detail.

Operation of
Item Remark
the signal ON
Shut off the power supply of the servo amplifier using an
Emergency stop
external circuit, and make the servomotor stop.
Servo OFF the "Forced stop" signal causes the servomotor to stop.
Forced stop (Refer to the instruction manual of the servo amplifier for
further details.)

3-8
3 DESIGN

3.3 Control Panel Layout Design

3.3.1 Mounting environment

Mount the Motion controller system in the following environment conditions.

(1) Ambient temperature within the range of 0 to 55°C (32 to 131°F) .

(2) Ambient humidity within the range of 5 to 95[%]RH.

(3) No condensing due to sudden temperature changes.

(4) No corrosive or inflammable gases.

(5) There must not be excessive dust, iron filings, oil mist, salt, or organic
solvents.

(6) No direct sunlight.

(7) No strong electrical or magnetic fields.

(8) No direct vibrations or shocks to the Motion controller.

3-9
3 DESIGN

3.3.2 Motion Controller Layout Design

This section describes the precautions related to mounting a Motion controller in

an enclosure.
(1) To improve ventilation and permit easy replacement of the module, leave sufficient
space between the top, bottom, side of the module and any other object (See
below list).
(For details on layout design refer to section 4.1.3 "Motion Controller Mounting
Instructions".)

• Top 40mm (1.57inch) or more

• Bottom 40mm (1.57inch) or more
• Front 100mm (3.94inch) or more
• Right side 1mm (0.04inch) or more
• Left side 30mm (1.18inch) or more

(2) Provide a wiring duct, if required.

CAUTION
Due to ventilation problems, do not mount the base units vertically or horizontally.
Mount the base units on a flat surface. Unevenness or warping of the surface can apply undue
force to printed circuit boards and lead to operation failures.
Avoid mounting the base units close to a vibration source, such as a large electromagnetic
contactor or no-fuse breaker. Mount them on a separate panel or at a safe distance.
To limit the effects of reflected noise and heat, leave 100mm(3.94inch) or more clearance to
instruments fitted in front of the Motion controller (on the rear of the door).

Install the MR-MQ100 to the left of the servo amplifier.

Separate the interval between MR-MQ100 and the servo amplifier by 1mm (0.04inch) or
more.
Leave at least 30mm (1.18inch) of space between the MR-MQ100 and any object to its left.

3 - 10
3 DESIGN

3.3.3 Calculating Motion Controller Heat Generation

The ambient temperature inside the panel storing the Motion controller must be
suppressed to the specified ambient temperature of 55°C(131°F) or less.
For the design of a heat releasing panel, it is necessary to know the average power
consumption (heating value) of the devices and instruments stored inside. "Use the
"Power consumption" on section 2.5.2 "MR-MQ100 hardware and wiring" (1) Unit
specification. From the power consumption, calculate a rise in ambient temperature
inside the control panel.

3.4 Design Checklist

Copy the following table for use as a check sheet at the worksite.

Item Sub Item Design confirmation Check

External Avoidance of operation failure at power-on
circuit Fail-safe circuit design
design Avoidance of hazard at Motion controller failure

Conformance with general specifications such as ambient

temperature, humidity, dust, etc.
Total power consumption of Motion controller
Layout W
Module layout design (Calculate the heating value)
design
Layout in consideration of clearances between enclosure's inside
walls, other structures and modules and heats generated by
modules within the control panel.

3 - 11
3 DESIGN

MEMO

3 - 12
4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

4. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

4.1 Motion Controller Installation

4.1.1 Handling Instructions

CAUTION
Use the Motion controller in an environment that meets the general specifications contained in this
manual. Using this Motion controller in an environment outside the range of the general
specifications could result in electric shock, fire, operation failure, and damage to or deterioration of
the product.
Install the motion controller to the control panel with screws. The tightening torque should be
within the specified range. If the screws are loose, the motion controller may drop or malfunction.
Or if the screws are too tight, they may break, causing the motion controller to drop or 4
malfunction.
Lock the control panel and prevent access to those who are not certified to handle or
install electric equipment.
Do not touch the heat radiating fins of controller or servo amplifier's, regenerative resistor
and servo motor, etc. while the power is ON and for a short time after the power is turned
OFF. In this timing, these parts become very hot and may lead to burns.
Remove the modules while paying attention.

This section describes instructions for handling the motion controller.

(1) Motion controller is made of resin, do not drop or subject to strong impact.

(2) In order to avoid changes in operation, do not remove the motion controller's
printed circuit boards from the enclosure.

(3) Tighten the Motion controller's fixing screws and FG terminal screws within the
tightening torque range specified below.
Location of screw Tightening torque range
Motion controller FG terminal fixing screw
0.82 to 1.11 N•m
(M4 12screw)
Motion controller fixing screw (M5 screw) 2.75 to 3.63 N•m (Note)
(Note) Torque range applies when the mounting panel is 2mm (0.88inch) thick and a fastening nut is
used to secure the screw from the back side of the panel.

4-1
4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

4.1.2 Motion Controller Installation

Be sure to fix the motion controller to the control panel using fixing screws. Not doing
so could result in vibration that may cause erroneous operation.

Mount the motion controller in the following procedure.

(a) Temporarily fasten the bottom side screw.

%QPVTQNRCPGN

Bottom
㩷㫊㫀㪻㪼㩷㫊㪺㫉㪼㫎

(b) Place the bottom side notch of the Motion controller onto the bottom side
screw.

%QPVTQNRCPGN
PULL

(c) Set a screw through the upper side hole of the motion controller to the
control panel.

%QPVTQNRCPGN
PULL

㪬㫇㫇㪼㫉㩷㫊㫀㪻㪼㩷
㫊㪺㫉㪼㫎

(d) Tighten both of the upper side screw and the bottom side screw.

4-2
4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

4.1.3 Motion Controller Mounting Instructions

When mounting the Motion controller to an enclosure or similar, fully consider its
operability, maintainability and environmental resistance.

(1) Fitting dimensions

OO
KPEJ
OO
KPEJ

OO
KPEJ

(2) Motion controller mounting position

Make space for air flow between the upper side and bottom side of the control
panel and the motion controller.

OO
KPEJ
OO
KPEJ
QTOQTG

P ULL

OO
KPEJ
5GTXQ QTOQTG &QQT
/QVKQP
CORNKHKGT
EQPVTQNNGT

OO
KPEJ
QTOQTG

OO
KPEJ OO
KPEJ
QTOQTG QTOQTG
OO
KPEJ
QTOQTG

4-3
4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

CAUTION
Install the MR-MQ100 to the left of the servo amplifier.
Separate the interval between MR-MQ100 and the servo amplifier by 1mm (0.04inch) or more.
Leave at least 30mm (1.18inch) of space between the MR-MQ100 and any object to its left.

(3) Motion controller mounting orientation

(a) Mount the Motion controller in the orientation shown below to ensure good
ventilation for heat release.

(b) Do not use it in any of the orientations shown below.

*QTK\QPVCNKPUVCNNCVKQP (NCV 7RUKFGFQYP

(4) Mounting surface

Mount the Motion controller on a flat surface. If the mounting surface is not even,
this may strain the printed circuit boards and cause malfunctions.

(5) Mounting of unit in an area where other devices are mounted

Avoid mounting the Motion controller in proximity to vibration sources such as
large magnetic contactors and no-fuse circuit breakers, (Mount these on a
separate panel or at a distance).

4-4
4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

(6) Distances from other devices

In order to avoid the effects of radiated noise and heat, provide the clearances
indicated below between the Motion controller and devices that generate noise or
heat (contactors and relays).
• In front of the Motion controller : 100 mm (3.94 inch) or more
• On the left of the Motion controller : 30 mm (1.18 inch) or more

OO
KPEJ
QTOQTG
OO
KPEJ
QTOQTG

%QPVCEVQTTGNC[GVE

%QPVCEVQTTGNC[GVE

POINT
(1) Make sure to tighten both the upper side screw and the bottom side screw.

(2) Tighten the screws within the specified torque range.

(3) If the screws are loose, the motion controller may drop or malfunction.

(4) If the screws are too tight, the screws or the unit may break and the motion
controller may drop or malfunction.

4-5
4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

4.2 Cable Connection and Disconnection

4.2.1 SSCNET cable

(1) Precautions for handling the SSCNET cable

• Do not stomp on the SSCNET cable.
• When laying the SSCNET cable, be sure to secure the minimum cable bend
radius or more. If the bend radius is less than the minimum cable bend radius, it
may cause malfunctions due to characteristic deterioration, wire breakage, etc.
• Hold the cable connector securely during connection and disconnection of the
SSCNET cable.

/QVKQPEQPVTQNNGT
PULL

%0

(2) Connection of SSCNET cable

• For connection of SSCNET cable to the Motion controller, connect it to the
SSCNET connector CN1 of the Motion controller while holding the SSCNET
cable connector’s tab. Be sure to insert it until it clicks.
• If the cord tip of the SSCNET cable is dirty, optical transmission may be
interfered and may result in malfunctions. If it becomes dirty, wipe with a
bonded textile or similar. Do not use solvent such as alcohol.

(3) Disconnection of SSCNET cable

• For disconnection of SSCNET cable, pull the cable out while holding the
SSCNET cable connector’s tab or the connector itself.
• After disconnection of SSCNET cable, be sure to replace the protective cap
(attached to Motion controller or servo amplifier) to the Motion controller and
servo amplifier.
• For SSCNET cable, attach the optical fiber protective tube to the end of the
connector.

4-6
4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

(4) Precautions of SSCNET cable wiring

The SSCNET cable is made from optical fiber. If the optical fiber undergoes
major shock, lateral pressure, haul, sudden bending or twisting, its insides may
distort or break, and optical transmission will not be possible. Since the optical
fiber for MR-J3BUS M, MR-J3BUS M-A is made of synthetic resin, it may melt
if left near fire or high temperature. Therefore, do not allow it to touch any part
which can achieve high temperatures, such as radiators or the regenerative
brake option of the servo amplifier.
Be sure to use the optical fiber within the range of operating temperature
described in this manual.
Read described item of this section carefully and handle with caution.

(a) Minimum bend radius

Make sure to lay the cable with greater radius than the minimum bend radius. Do
not press the cable to edges of the equipment or anything else. For SSCNET
cable, the appropriate length should be selected with consideration of the
dimensions and arrangement of the Motion controller or servo amplifier. When
closing the door of control box, pay careful attention to avoid pinching the
SSCNET cable with the case door or a situation where the cable bend
becomes smaller than the minimum bend radius.
Model name of SSCNET cable Minimum bend radius[mm(inch)]
MR-J3BUS M 25(0.98)
Enforced covering cord : 50 (1.97)
MR-J3BUS M-A
Code : 25 (0.98)
Enforced covering cord : 50 (1.97)
MR-J3BUS M-B
Code : 30 (1.18)

(b) Tension
If tension is added to the SSCNET cable, the increase of transmission loss
occurs due to external forces concentrated on attachment portion of the
SSCNET cable or the connecting tab of SSCNET connector. At worst,
breakage of the SSCNET cable or damage to the SSCNET connector may
occur. For cable laying, handle without adding forced tension. (Refer to
"APPENDIX1.1 SSCNET cables" for the tension strength.)

(c) Lateral pressure

If lateral pressure is applied to the SSCNET cable, the cable itself distorts and
internal optical fiber becomes stressed. Then transmission loss increases. At
worst, breakage of the optical cable may occur. As the same condition also
occurs during cable laying, do not bundle or fasten the SSCNET cable with
anything such as nylon bands (tie wrap), etc.
Do not stomp or tuck it down with the door of control box , etc.

4-7
4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

(d) Twisting
If the SSCNET cable is twisted, it will have the same effect as when local lateral
pressure or bending is applied. Consequently, transmission loss increases and
breakage of the optical fiber may occur.

(e) Disposal
When incinerating optical cable (cord) used for SSCNET , hydrogen fluoride gas
or hydrogen chloride gas which is corrosive and harmful may be generated. For
disposal of optical fiber, request for specialized industrial waste disposal services
which have an incineration facility for disposing hydrogen fluoride gas or
hydrogen chloride gas.

(f) Wiring process of SSCNET cable

Put the SSCNET cable in the duct or fix the cable to the closest part of the
Motion controller with bundle material in order to prevent the SSCNET cable
from putting its own weight on SSCNET connector.
Leave the following space for wiring.

• Putting in the duct

Top of control panel or wiring duct

OO
KPEJ
OO
KPEJ
QTOQTG

P ULL

OO
KPEJ
5GTXQ QTOQTG &QQT
/QVKQP
CORNKHKGT
EQPVTQNNGT

OO
KPEJ
QTOQTG

OO
KPEJ OO
KPEJ
QTOQTG QTOQTG
OO
KPEJ
QTOQTG

CAUTION
Install the MR-MQ100 to the left of the servo amplifier.
Separate the interval between MR-MQ100 and the servo amplifier by 1mm (0.04inch) or
more.
Leave at least 30mm (1.18inch) of space between the MR-MQ100 and any object to its left.

4-8
4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

• Bundle fixing
Optical cord should be given loose slack to avoid from becoming smaller than the
minimum bend radius, and it should not be twisted. When laying cable, fix and
hold it in position with using cushioning such as sponge or rubber which does not
contain plasticizing material.
Model name of SSCNET Minimum bend radius[mm(inch)]
cable Enforced covering cord Code
MR-J3BUS M 25(0.98) 25(0.98)
MR-J3BUS M-A 50 (1.97) 25 (0.98)
MR-J3BUS M-B 50 (1.97) 30 (1.18)

/QVKQPEQPVTQNNGT

%QPVTQN
RCPGN

%QTF
.QQUGUNCEM
/KPKOWODGPFTCFKWU
QHEQTF

/KPKOWODGPFTCFKWU
QH'PHQTEGFEQXGTKPIEQTF %CDNG

$WPFNGOCVGTKCN
4GEQOOGPFGFRTQFWEV
0-ENCOR52V[RG
0+:+0%

4-9
4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

POINT
(1) Be sure to connect SSCNET cable with the above connector. If the
connection is mistaken, between the Motion controller and servo amplifier
cannot be communicated.
(2) Forcible removal the SSCNET cable from the Motion controller may damage
the Motion controller and SSCNET cables.
(3) After removal of the SSCNET cable, be sure to replace the cap on the
SSCNET connector. Otherwise, adhesion of dirt nay deteriorates the cable’s
characteristic and cause malfunctions.
(4) Do not remove the SSCNET cable with the power supply of Motion controller
or servo amplifier turned on.
Do not look directly into the light generated from SSCNET connector of the
Motion controller or servo amplifier or the end of SSCNET cable. The light
can damage the eye (The light source of SSCNET cable complies with
class1 defined in JISC6802 or IEC60825-1.)
(5) If the SSCNET cable undergoes major shock, lateral pressure, haul, sudden
bending or twisting, or similar forces, the inside may distort or brake, and
optical transmission will not be possible.
Be sure to take sufficient care so that the SSCNET cable can easily bend or
twist without damage.
(6) Be sure to use the SSCNET cable within the range of operating temperature
described in this manual. Especially, as optical fiber for MR-J3BUS M and
MR-J3BUS M-A are made of synthetic resin, it may melt if left near a fire or
high temperature. The cable portion and cord portion melt if left near the fire or
high temperature. Therefore, do not allow either to touch any part which is
high in temperature, such as radiators or the regenerative brake option of
servo amplifier, or servomotor.
(7) When laying the SSCNET cable, be sure to secure the minimum cable bend
radius or more.
(8) Put the SSCNET cable in a duct or fix the cable to the closest part of the
Motion CPU module with bundle material in order to prevent the SSCNET
cable from putting its own weight on SSCNET connector.
When laying cable, the optical cord should be given loose slack to avoid from
becoming smaller than the minimum bend radius, and it should not be twisted.
Also, fix and hold it in position with using cushioning such as sponge or rubber
which does not contain plasticizing material.

4 - 10
4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

POINT

(9) Migrating plasticizer is used for vinyl tape. Keep the MR-J3BUS M, and MR-
J3BUS M-A cables away from vinyl tape because the optical characteristic
may be affected.

Cable
Optical cord

SSCNET cable Cord Cable

MR-J3BUS M
MR-J3BUS M-A
MR-J3BUS M-B
Cable is not affected by plasticizers.
Phthalate ester plasticizer such as DBP and DOP may affect optical
characteristic of cable.
Generally, soft polyvinyl chloride (PVC), polyethylene resin (PE) and Teflon
(fluorine resin) contain non-migrating plasticizer and they do not affect the optical
characteristic of SSCNET cable. However, some wire sheaths and cable ties, which
contain migrating plasticizer (phthalate ester), may affect MR-J3BUS M and MR-
J3BUS M-A cables. In addition, MR-J3BUS M-B cable is not affected by
plasticizer.
(10) The adhesion of solvent and oil to the cord part of SSCNET cable may
lower the optical characteristic and machine characteristic. If used in such an
environment, be sure to take protective measures for the cord portion.
(11) When storing the Motion CPU or servo amplifier, be sure to replace the
protective cap on the connector so that dirt can not adhere to the end of
SSCNET connector.
(12) The SSCNET connector connected to the SSCNET cable contains a cap to
protect the light device inside the connector from dust. For this reason, do not
remove the cap until just before connecting the SSCNET cable. Always
replace the cap after removing the SSCNET cable.
(13) Be sure to keep the fiber optic protective cap and tube for the SSCNET cable
in a sealed plastic bag to prevent them from becoming dirty.
(14) When exchanging the Motion controller or servo amplifier, be sure to replace
the cap on SSCNET connector. When sending a Motion controller or servo
amplifier in for repair, also be sure to replace the cap on the SSCNET
connector. Without the cap, the light device may be damaged during transit. In
this case, exchange and repair of light device is required.

4 - 11
4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

4.2.2 24VDC power supply cable

(1) Precautions for handling the 24VDC power supply cable

• For connection or removal of the 24VDC power supply cable, do it surely
while holding a connector of 24VDC power supply cable.

/QVKQPEQPVTQNNGT

*QQM
24VDC

(2) Connection of the 24VDC power supply cable

• For connection of a 24VDC power supply cable to the Motion controller
connect it surely to a 24VDC power supply connector of Motion controller
while holding a connector. Be sure to insert it until it clicks.

(3) Removal of the 24VDC power supply cable

• For removal of the 24VDC power supply cable, push a tab and pull out the
cable while holding a connector.

POINT
Forcibly removal the 24VDC power supply cable from the Motion controller will
damage the Motion controller or 24VDC power supply cable.

4 - 12
4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

4.3 Wiring

4.3.1 Wiring Instructions

DANGER
Completely turn off the externally supplied power used in the system before installation or removal of
the module. Not doing so could result in electric shock or damage to the product.
When turning on the power supply or operating the module after wiring, be sure that the module's
terminal covers are correctly attached. Not attaching the terminal cover could result in electric shock.

CAUTION
Be sure to ground the earth terminal FG to avoid an electric shock or operation failure. (Ground
resistance: 100 or less)
When wiring in the Motion controller, be sure that it is done correctly by checking the product's rated
voltage and the terminal layout. Connecting a power supply that is different from the rating or
incorrectly wiring the product could result in fire or damage.
External connections shall be crimped or pressure welded with the specified tools, or correctly
soldered. Imperfect connections could result in short circuit, fire, or operation failure.
Be sure there are no foreign matters such as sawdust or wiring debris inside the module. Such
debris could cause fire, damage, or operation failure.

This section describes the power supply wiring instructions.

Refer to the "15 EMC directives" for grounding method and measure against noise

(1) Power supply wiring

(a) 24VDC power supply wires should be twisted as dense as possible.
Connect the modules using the shortest distance possible.
Use wires with the following conductor sizes.
Application Recommended core size AWG (Note)
24VDC power supply wire 0.34 to 0.37mm2 AWG22
2
External I/O signal wire 0.3 to 0.75mm AWG22 to AWG18
Ground wire 2.0mm2 or more AWG14 or less
(Note): AWG stands for "American Wire Gauge".

(b) Do not bundle the 24VDC power supply wire with, or run them close to, the
main circuit (high voltage, large current) or I/O signal lines (including
common line).
Reserve a distance of at least 100mm (3.94inch) from adjacent wires.

4 - 13
4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

(c) Noise due to a lightning surge may cause an instantaneous power failure or
reset of the motion controller.
As a counter-measures to lightning surges, connect a surge absorber as
shown below.
Using the surge absorber for lightening can reduce the influence of
lightening.

#% 8&% /QVKQP
RQYGTUWRRN[ EQPVTQNNGT

' '

' 5WTIGCDUQTDGTHQTlightning

POINT
(1) "E1: earth of surge suppressor for lightning", "E2: earth of the 24VDC power
supply" and "E3: the motion controller's earth" must be grounded separately.

(2) Select a surge absorber for lightning whose power supply voltage does not
exceed the maximum allowable circuit voltage even at the time of maximum
power supply voltage elevation.

(2) Wiring of I/O equipment

(a) The wires used for connection to external I/O signals should contain 0.3 to
0.75mm2 (AWG22 to AWG18) conductors and 2.8mm (0.11inch) or less in
outside diameter.

(b) Do not run the input and output lines close to each other.

(c) When the wiring cannot be run away from the main circuit and power lines,
use a batch-shielded cable and ground it on the Motion controller side.
In some cases, ground it in the opposite side.
/QVKQPEQPVTQNNGT
5JKGNFECDNG
+PRWV

4#
1WVRWV 5JKGNF

&%

(d) Whenever wiring runs through piping, be sure to ground the piping without
fail.

(e) Run the 24VDC input line away from the 100VAC and 200VAC lines.

4 - 14
4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

(f) As a countermeasure against a power surge due to lightning, separate the

AC wiring and DC wiring and connect a surge absorber (Refer to Section
4.3.1(1)).
Failure to do so increases the risk of I/O device failure due to lightning.

(3) Grounding
For grounding, follow the steps (a) to (c) shown below.
(a) Use dedicated grounding wire as much as possible.
(Ground resistance: 100 or less)

(b) When dedicated grounding cannot be used, use (2) Common Grounding
shown below.

Motion Another Motion Another Motion Other

controller equipment controller equipment controller equipment

Grounding Grounding

(1) Independent grounding…..Best (2) Common grounding….Good (3) Joint Grounding….Not allowed

(c) For grounding cable, use cable of 2 mm2 or thicker.

Position the ground-contact point as close to the Motion controller as
possible, and reduce the length of the grounding cable as much as possible.

4 - 15
4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

4.3.2 Connecting to the power supply module

The following diagram shows the wiring example of power lines, grounding lines, etc.
to the Motion controller.

8#% 8&%

#% #% &% PULL

(WUG
#%
&%
8&%

0QVG

()

(Note) : Connect to power input terminals of I/O signals that require 24VDC.

POINT
(1) Use a different 24VDC power supply for MR-MQ100 and for I/O components.

(2) Use different 24VDC power supplies for the MR-MQ100 and the
electromagnetic brake of the servomotor.

(3) Refer to "Wiring of 24VDC power supply connector of MR-MQ100" chapter 2.

(4) Motion controller and 24VDC power supply are an open type device and must
be installed inside a control panel for use.
This not only ensures safety but also ensures effective shielding of the Motion
controller and 24VDC power supply electromagnetic noise.

4 - 16
5 TRIAL OPERATION AND ADJUSTMENT

5. TRIAL OPERATION AND ADJUSTMENT

5.1 Checklist before Trial Operation

Table 5.1 Checklists before Trial Operation

Model name Confirmation Items Check Reference
(1) Check for looseness, rattling or incorrect installation. 4.1.1
(2) Check that the module fixing screw tightening torque is as specified. 4.1.1
(3) Check that the wire sizes of cables are correct. 4.3.1
(4) Check that the power line is wired correctly. 4.3.1, 2.5.3
(5) Check that the polarity of power supply line is corrected. 2.5.3
(6) Check that FG is wired correctly. 4.3.1
(7) Check that the FG terminal screws are tightened correctly.
(8) Check that the FG terminal screws are tightening torque is as
4.1.1
MR-MQ100 specified.
Motion controller (9) Check that the 24VDC power supply wire is twisted as tightly as
4.3.1
possible and run in the shortest distance.
(10) Check that the 24VDC power supply wire is not bound to or runs
4.3.1
close to the power wires.
(11) Check for grounding of the earth terminal FG . 4.3.1
(12) Check that the battery is connected correctly. 2.5.5 5
(13) Check that the internal I/F are wired correctly. 2.5.2
(14) Check that the Manual pulse generator or INC synchronous encoder
2.5.2
is wired correctly.
(1) Check that the rotary switch is set to "0". 2.5.4
MR-J3- B
(2) Check that the connection with the main circuit power supply is
Servo amplifier 3.2
correct.
(1) Check that the model name of SSCNET cables is correct.
(2) Check that the SSCNET cables are connected to the correct 2.5.4
location.
(3) Check that the SSCNET cables are connected properly. 4.2.1
SSCNET cable (4) Check for looseness, rattling or incorrect connection. 4.2.1
(5) Check that the bend radius meets the minimum requirement or more. 4.2.1
(6) Check that the MR-J3BUS M or MR-J3BUS M-A do not come in
contact with wires/cables that use materials with the plasticizing 4.2.1
material.

5-1
5 TRIAL OPERATION AND ADJUSTMENT

5.2 Trial Operation and Adjustment Procedure

The mode indicated in the brackets [ ] at top left of
Servo start-up procedure each step is the mode for checking or setting using
MT Developer2.

Turn OFF Motion controller power supply

Motion Check that the power supply of Motion
controller controller is OFF.

Check wiring and module installation Refer to Section 4.1 for installation method.
(1) Check the installation of the servo
amplifier.
(2) Check the connecting condition of
connectors. DANGER
(3) Check that all terminal screws are tight. Be sure to ground the Motion controllers, servo
(4) Check the ground wires of servo amplifiers and servomotors.
amplifier, etc.. (Ground resistance: 100 or less)
(5) Check the servomotor wiring (U, V, W). Do not ground commonly with other devices.
(6) Check the regenerative resistor wiring.
(7) Check the circuit of emergency stop or
forced stop.

Servo amplifier setting

Servo amplifier Set the axis number of the servo

amplifier to “0”

Turn ON power supply

Motion Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch of
controller Motion controller to STOP, and turn ON
the Motion controller power supply. CAUTION
When using a regenerative resistor, shut the
[System setting] power OFF with an error signal. The
Motion controller parameters setting regenerative resistor may abnormally overheat
due to a fault in the regenerative transistor, etc.,
Set the positioning parameters and may lead to fires.
Motion using MT Developer2.
Always take heat measure such as flame
controller (1) System setting proofing for the inside of the control panel where
the servo amplifier or regenerative resistor is
mounted and for the wires used. Failing to do so
may lead to fires.

1)

5-2
5 TRIAL OPERATION AND ADJUSTMENT

1)
(Note) : An error may occur if the power is turned on
before system setting. In the case, reset the
Turn ON power supply again Multiple CPU system after system setting.
Cycle the power of the Motion Controller. Refer to the "Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion
controller Programming Manual (COMMON)"
at the system setting error occurrence.

Check external inputs

Check the wiring of the external signal
inputs by the device monitoring of
MT Developer2.
(1) Check the wiring of
FLS(Upper stroke limit input),
RLS(Lower stroke limit input).
(2) Check the wiring of proximity DOG
signal when you use home position
return of proximity DOG type.

Check pulse inputs Refer to Section 2.5.2

Check the wiring of the external inputs by
the device monitor of MT Developer2.
(1) Check that the current value device
(D1120,D1121) counts when a
Motion manual pulse genarator or a
controller synchronous encoder are used. CAUTION
Do not mount a phase advancing capacitor,
Check I/O signal surge absorber or radio noise filter (option FR-
BIF) on the output side of the servo amplifier.
Check the wiring of the I/O signal by
the device monitor of MT Developer2. Correctly connect the output side (terminal U, V,
W). Incorrect connections will lead the
servomotor to operate abnormally.

[Servo data setting]

Positioning parameters setting CAUTION
Set the following positioning parameters Set parameter values to those that are
using MT Developer. compatible with the Motion controller, servo
(1) Fixed parameters amplifier, servomotor and regenerative resistor
(2) Home position return data model name and the system name application.
(3) Jog parameters The protective functions may not function if the
settings are incorrect.
(4) Servo parameters
(5) Parameter block
(6) Limit switch

2)

5-3
5 TRIAL OPERATION AND ADJUSTMENT

2) DANGER
When performing wiring work or inspections,
[Programming] turn the power OFF, wait at least ten minutes,
Create Motion programs and then check the voltage with a tester, etc..
Motion Failing to do so may lead to electric shocks.
Create the Motion programs using
controller MT Developer2. Wire the units after mounting the Motion
controller, servo amplifier and servomotor.
Failing to do so may lead to electric shocks or
damage.

Write Motion programs

Motion Write the positioning data and Motion

controller programs created to the Motion controller.

Turn ON power supply again CAUTION

Cycle the power of the Motion Controller . Always mount a leakage breaker on the Motion
controller and servo amplifier power source.

Install emergency stop circuit externally so that

operation can be stopped immediately and the
power shut off.
Turn ON servo amplifiers power supply Use the program commands for the program
Check the emergency stop ON and forced with the conditions specified in the instruction
stop ON, and turn ON the power supply of manual.
servo amplifiers and servomotors. Some devices used in the program have fixed
applications, so use these with the conditions
[Test mode specified in the programming manual.
servo start-up
(Initial check) ]
Check servo amplifier Axis No. and error description of servo amplifier which
detected errors are displayed on initial check screen.
Check that the mounted servo amplifiers
operate correctly.
CAUTION
[Test mode
Motion If safety standards (ex., robot safety rules, etc., )
servo start-up apply to the system using the Motion controller,
controller (Upper/lower stroke servo amplifier and servomotor, make sure that
limit check) ] the safety standards are satisfied.
Check upper/lower stroke limits Construct a safety circuit externally of the
Check that the upper/lower stroke limits Motion controller or servo amplifier if the
abnormal operation of the Motion controller or
operate correctly.
servo amplifier differ from the safety directive
operation in the system.

3)

5-4
5 TRIAL OPERATION AND ADJUSTMENT

3)

[Test mode
JOG operation ]
Check machine operation
CAUTION
Check the followings by making the machine
operate with the JOG operation of The system must have a mechanical
MT Developer2. allowance so that the machine itself can stop
(1) Machine operates correctly
even if the stroke limits switch is passed
(no vibration, hunting, etc. )
(2) Stroke limits operate correctly through at the max. speed.
(3) Machine stops by the emergency stop Execute the test operation in the system that
or forced stop. it is low-speed as much as possible and put
forced stop, and confirm the operation and
[Test mode safety.
home position return ]
Check home position return
Check the followings by executing the home
position return.
(1) Home position return direction
(2) Home position return data
(3) Proximity dog position

Motion
controller [Programming]
Check Motion program
Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch of Motion
controller to RUN , and check that all
positioning controls by Motion programs are
correct.

[Monitor]
Check by automatic operation

Motion Check the sequence operation by executing

the PLC program using an actual external
controller input.

END

POINT
(1) Make a note of the series name of the motor before mounting to a machine.
The servo motor name plate may not be visible after the servo motor is
mounted.

(2) When the servo amplifier, servomotor is first turned on, check the operation
before mounting them to a machine in order to avoid unexpected accidents
such as machine damage.

5-5
5 TRIAL OPERATION AND ADJUSTMENT

5.3 Operating System Software Installation Procedure

The operating system software can be installed to the Motion controller from a
computer running MT Developer2.
The installation procedure is shown below.

START

Set the first rotary switch (SW1) of the Set to installation mode.
motion controller to position "A". (Rotary
switch 2's (SW2) position does not matter) Refer to Section 2.5.1(3) for rotary switch.

Shipped from the factory in

SW1 "0", SW2 "0" position.

Turn ON the Motion controller power

supply. Steady "INS" display.

Install the operating system software

using MT Developer2.

Turn OFF the Motion controller power

supply.

Set the both rotary switches (SW1 and

Set to mode operated by RAM.
SW2) of the motion controller to position
"0".

END

POINT
(1) The operating system software is installed at the time of Motion controller
purchase. It is necessary to install operating system software again after any
upgrades.

(2) Be sure to change the rotary switches only after first turning off the power
supply.

(3) Even if the operating system software is installed, the programs, parameters
and absolute position data written to the Motion controller is not overwritten.

(4) Do not do any of the following while installing operating system software.
Doing so could result damage the Motion controller.
• Turn off the motion controller's power supply.
• Change the RUN/STOP/RESET switch of Motion controller to RESET.
• Turn off the power supply of the personal computer.
• Pull out the personal computer’s communications cable.

5-6
5 TRIAL OPERATION AND ADJUSTMENT

5.4 Trial Operation and Adjustment Checklist

At the worksite, copy the following table for use as a check sheet.
Work Step Item Trial Operation and Adjustment Confirmation Check
Check that each module is installed correctly.
Check that each connector is connected correctly.
Check each terminal screw for looseness.
Installation of Check that the earth wires of Motion controller or servo amplifiers, etc. are correct.
Before power
unit/module Check that the servomotor wiring is correct.
supply ON
and basic wiring Check that the regenerative option wiring is correct.
Check that the circuit of emergency stop and forced stop are correct.
Check that the wiring of each power supply and I/O are correct.
Check that the rotary switch settings are correct.
System setting Check that the system setting is correct.
Check that the upper/lower stroke limit inputs are correct.
External signal
Check that the proximity dog and speed-position switching signal input are correct.
Program/ Check that the Motion program, PLC program and positioning data are stored in
positioning data the motion controller correctly.
Power supply ON, Check communications with servo amplifiers.
Motion controller in Check that the rotation direction for JOG operation is correct.
STOP status Check that the upper/lower limit switches operate correctly.
Check that the maximum commanded rotation speed is within the motor’s rating
Basic axis
Check that the machine operates correctly by the JOG operation.
operations
Check that the machine stops by the upper/lower stroke limit.
Check that the machine stops by the emergency stop or forced stop.
Check that the home position return is executed correctly.
Check that each positioning control of the motion program operates correctly.
Checks for each operation in manual operation mode during Motion program
execution.
Check that the machine operation stops immediately by the emergency stop or
forced stop.
Manual operation
Check the operation of each actuator and confirm limit switch operation.
Check that the emergency stop, forced stop and equipment alarm signals are
correct.
Check for compliance with control specifications specific to system and equipment.
Checks for each operation in automatic operation mode during Motion program
Motion controller in execution.
RUN status Check that the automatic operation works.
Check that the machine operation stops immediately by the emergency stop or
Automatic forced stop.
operation Check that the module or equipment alarm causes an immediate stop or cycle
stop.
Check that restoring operations can be performed after an alarm stop.
Make other checks in compliance with control specifications specific to system and
equipment.
Check that the acceleration/deceleration torque is maximum torque or less.
Torque check
Check that the continuous effective load torque is rated torque or less.

5-7
5 TRIAL OPERATION AND ADJUSTMENT

MEMO

5-8
6 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

6. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

In order that you can use the motion controller in normal and optimal conditions at all
times, this section describes those items that must be maintained or inspected daily or
at regular intervals.

DANGER
Do not touch the terminals while power is on. Doing so could cause electric shock.
Correctly connect the battery. Also, do not charge, disassemble, heat, place in fire, short circuit, or
solder the battery.
Mishandling of a battery may cause overheating, cracks or ignition which could result in injury and
fire.
Switch off all phases of the externally supplied power used in the system when cleaning the
module or retightening the terminal or Motion controller's mounting screws.
Not doing so could result in electric shock.
Under tightening of terminal screws can cause a short circuit or malfunction.
Over tightening of screws can cause damages to the screws and the Motion controller,
resulting in fallout, short circuits, or malfunction.
The capacitors are mounted on the Motion controller. Do not incinerate the Motion controller so
that the incineration of capacitor may cause a burst.

6
CAUTION
Read the manual carefully and pay careful attention to safety for the on-line operation (especially
program change, forced stop or operation change) performed by connecting peripheral devices to
the Motion controller during operation.
Erroneous operation may cause machine breakage or accident.
Never try to disassemble or modify Motion controller. It may cause product failure, operation failure,
injury or fire.
Use any radio communication device such as a cellular phone or a PHS phone more than 25cm
(9.85 inch) away in all directions of the Motion controller.
Failure to do so may cause a malfunction.
Completely turn off the externally supplied power used in the system before installation or removing
the Motion controller. Not doing so could result in damage to the product.
Do not drop or impact the battery installed to the Motion controller. Doing so may damage the
battery, causing battery liquid to leak in the battery.
Do not use the dropped or impacted battery, but dispose of it.
Before touching the Motion controller, always touch grounded metal, etc. to discharge static electricity
from human body. Failure to do so may cause the Motion controller to fail or malfunction.
Do not directly touch the Motion controller's conductive parts and electronic components. Touching
them could cause an operation failure or give damage to the Motion controller.

6-1
6 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

6.1 Maintenance

6.1.1 Inspection Instructions

In order to ensure safe and normal operation of the Motion controller, the below items
must be inspected.

DANGER
Never open the front case while the power is ON or the unit is running, as this may lead to electric
shocks.
Never run the unit with the front case cover removed. The high voltage terminal and charged
sections will be exposed and may lead to electric shocks.
Never remove the front case at times other than wiring work or periodic inspections even if the power
is OFF. The insides of the Motion controller and servo amplifier are charged and may lead to electric
shocks.
When performing wiring work or inspections, turn the power OFF, wait at least ten minutes, and then
check the voltage with a tester, etc.. Failing to do so may lead to electric shocks.
Never operate the switches with wet hands, as this may lead to electric shocks.
Do not damage, apply excessive stress, place heavy things on or sandwich the cables, as this may
lead to electric shocks or fire.
Do not touch the Motion controller, servo amplifier or servomotor terminal blocks while the power is
ON, as this may lead to electric shocks.
Do not touch the built-in power supply, built-in grounding or signal wires of the Motion controller and
servo amplifier, as this may lead to electric shocks.

CAUTION
Be sure to ground the Motion controller, servo amplifier and servomotor. Do not ground
commonly with other devices. (Ground resistance : 100 or less)
The wiring work and inspections must be done by a qualified technician.
Wire the units after mounting the Motion controller, servo amplifier and servomotor. Failing to do so
may lead to electric shocks or damage.
Perform the daily and periodic inspections according to the instruction manual.
Perform maintenance and inspection after backing up the program and parameters for the Motion
controller and servo amplifier.
Do not place fingers or hands in the clearance when opening or closing any opening.
Periodically replace consumable parts such as batteries according to the instruction manual.
Do not touch the lead sections such as ICs or the connector contacts.
Do not place the Motion controller or servo amplifier on metal that may cause a power leakage or
wood, plastic or vinyl that may cause static electricity buildup.
Do not perform a megger test (insulation resistance measurement) during inspection.
When replacing the Motion controller or servo amplifier, always set the new unit settings correctly.
After maintenance and inspections are completed, confirm that the position detection of the
absolute position detector function is correct.

6-2
6 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

CAUTION
Do not short circuit, charge, overheat, incinerate or disassemble the batteries.
The electrolytic capacitor will generate gas during a fault, so do not place your face near the Motion
controller or servo amplifier.
The electrolytic capacitor and fan will deteriorate. Periodically change these to prevent secondary
damage from faults. Replacements can be made by our sales representative.
If an error occurs in the self diagnosis of the Motion controller or servo amplifier, confirm the check
details according to the instruction manual, and restore the operation.
If a dangerous state is predicted in case of a power failure or product failure, in order to prevent that
state, use a servomotor with electromagnetic brakes for maintenance or mount a brake mechanism
externally.
Use a double circuit construction so that the electromagnetic brake operation circuit can be operated
by emergency stop signals set externally.
Shut off with the
Shut off with servo ON signal OFF, emergency stop
alarm, electromagnetic brake signal. signal (EMG).

Servomotor
RA1 EMG

Electromagnetic
brakes
24VDC

If an error occurs, remove the cause, secure the safety and then resume operation after alarm
release.
The unit may suddenly restart after a power failure is restored, so do not go near the machine.
(Design the machine so that personal safety can be ensured even if the machine restarts suddenly.)
Confirm and adjust the program and each parameter before operation. Unpredictable movements
may occur depending on the machine.
Extreme adjustments and changes may lead to unstable operation, so never make them.
Do not apply a voltage other than that specified in the instruction manual on any terminal.
Doing so may lead to destruction or damage.
Do not mistake the terminal connections, as this may lead to destruction or damage.
Do not mistake the polarity ( + / - ), as this may lead to destruction or damage.
Do not touch the heat radiating fins of controller or servo amplifier, regenerative resistor and
servomotor, etc., while the power is ON and for a short time after the power is turned OFF. In this
timing, these parts become very hot and may lead to burns.
Always turn the power OFF before touching the servomotor shaft or coupled machines, as these
parts may lead to injuries.
Do not go near the machine during test operations or during operations such as teaching. Doing so
may lead to injuries.
Do not bunch the control wires or communication cables with the main circuit or power wires, or
lay them closely. They should be installed 100 mm (3.94 inch) or more from each other.
Trying to bunch or install could result in noise that would cause operation failure.

6-3
6 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

6.2 Daily Inspection

The items that must be inspected daily are shown below.

Table 6.1 Daily Inspection
Item Inspection item Inspection Criterion Action
Check that the fixing
Mounting of Retighten the
1 screws are not loose and The screws and cover must be mounted securely.
Motion controller screws.
the cover is not dislocated.
Retighten the
Check for loose FG
Screws should not be loose. FG terminal
terminal screws.
screws.
Check for distance between The proper clearance should be provided between solder-
2 Connecting conditions Correct.
solder-less terminals. less terminals.
Retighten the
Check the connector part of
Connections should not be loose. connector fixing
the cable.
screws.

The LED should be ON (red). Refer to Section

[POWER] LED Check that the LED is ON.
(The LED off with power supplied is an abnormal situation). 2.5.1

Steady "RUN" display.

(Abnormal if "RUN" is not displayed or is incorrectly
displayed.) Refer to Section
Normal
2.5.1(2)
Module indication LED

Steady "STP" display.

(Abnormal if "STP" is not displayed or incorrectly displayed.)
Motion controller

Battery error
3 "BT1" should not be displayed.
warning
(Abnormal if steady "BT1" is displayed.)
(2.7V or less) Refer to Section
Battery error 6.5
"BT2" should not be displayed.
warning
(Abnormal if steady "BT2" is displayed.)
(2.5V or less)
" . . . " should not be displayed.
WDT error
(Abnormal if steady " . . ." is displayed.)
Refer to Section
2.5.1(2)
" AL" should not flash.
Others
(Abnormal if " . . ." is flashing.)

6-4
6 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

6.3 Periodic Inspection

The items that must be inspected one or two times every 6 months to 1 year are listed
below. When the equipment is moved or modified, or layout of the wiring is changed,
also implement this inspection.

Table 6.2 Periodic Inspection

Item Inspection item Inspection Judgment criteria Remedy
Ambient environment

Ambient temperature 0 to 55 °C (32 to 131 °F)

When the controller is used
Measure with a thermometer and a in an enclosure, the ambient
1 Ambient humidity hygrometer. 5 to 95 % RH environment in the enclosure
Measure corrosive gas. becomes the operating
environment.
Atmosphere No corrosive gases

Measure the voltage across the

2 Power voltage 21.6 to 26.4VDC Change the power supply.
terminals of 24VDC.
Connection Installation

Move the Motion controller to The module must be installed Retighten the screws.
Looseness, rattling
check for looseness and rattling. securely.
3
Adhesion of dirt and Dirt and foreign matter must not
Check visually. Remove and clean.
foreign matter be present.
Looseness of FG Try to further tighten screws with a Retighten the terminal
Screws must not be loose.
terminal screws screwdriver. screws.
4
Looseness of Retighten the connector
Check visually. Connectors must not be loose.
connectors fixing screws.
Check the 7-segment LED on the "BT1" or "BT2" must not be Even if the lowering of a
front side of MR-MQ100. displayed. battery capacity is not
shown, replace the battery
Check the length of term after Must not be used for more than 5 with a new one if the service
5 Battery purchasing the battery years. life time of the battery is
exceeded.
Check that SM51 or SM58 is Replace the battery with a
turned OFF using MT Developer2 Must be turned OFF. new one when SM51 or
monitor. SM58 is ON.

6-5
6 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

6.4 Life

The following parts must be changed periodically as listed below.

However, if any part is found faulty, it must be changed immediately even when it has
not yet reached the end of its life, which depends on the operating method and
environmental conditions.
For parts replacement, please contact a local sales representative.

Table 6.3 Life

Module name Part name Life guideline Remark
Life guideline a reference only.
Capacitor
If any abnormality is discovered,
10 years the capacitor must be changed
Motion controller Electrolytic capacitor immediately even if it has not yet
reached the life guideline.

(1) Capacitor
The life of the capacitor greatly depends on ambient temperature and operating
conditions. The capacitor will reach the end of its in 10 years of continuous
operation in normal air-conditioned environment.

6-6
6 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

6.5 Battery

The battery installed in the Motion controller is used for data retention of the program
memory and latch device during a power failure.
Special relays SM51, SM52, SM58, or SM59 turn on due to a decrease in battery
voltage. Even if the special relays turn on, the program and retained data are not
erased immediately.
However, if these relays are overlooked, the contents may be erased.
After relay SM51 or SM58 turns on, replace the battery quickly within the data
retention time for power failure (3 minutes).

POINT
(1) SM51 or SM58 turns on when the battery voltage falls below the specified
value, and remains ON even after the voltage is recovered to the normal
value. SM51 or SM58 turns off after a power supply cycle or reset.
(2) After SM51 or SM58 turns on, replace the battery immediately.
• SM51 or SM52 turns on if the battery voltage becomes 2.5V or less.
• SM58 or SM59 turns on if the battery voltage becomes 2.7V or less.
(3) If SM51 turns on, the details of the programs, parameters and absolute position
and latch data cannot be guaranteed.
It is recommended to back-up the battery periodically.
(4) The data stored in the RAM built-in Motion controller are shown below.
Programs, Parameters, Motion devices (#), Devices of latch range,
and Absolute position data

6-7
6 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

6.5.1 Battery life

The battery life is shown below.

Battery life (Total power failure time) [h] (Note-1)

Actual service value
Power-on time Guaranteed value Guaranteed value
Module type (Note-5) Backup time after alarm
ratio (Note-3) (Note-4)
(Reference value) (Note-6)
(Note-2) (MIN) (75°C (167°F)) (TYP) (40°C (104°F))
(TYP) (25°C (77°F))
0% 20000
30% 27000
Q6BAT 90
50% 31000 43800 43800
(note-7) (After SM51/SM52ON)
70% 36000
100% 43800
0% 39000
30%
Q7BAT 90
50% 43800 43800
(note-7) 43800 (After SM51/SM52ON)
70%
100%
(Note-1) : The actual service value indicates the average value, and the guaranteed time indicates the minimum time.
(Note-2) : The power-on time ratio indicates the ratio of Motion controller power-on time to one day (24 hours).
17
Power-on time ratio u 100 70[%]
24
(When the total power-on time is 17 hours and the total power-off time is 7 hours, the power-on time ratio is 70%.)
(Note-3) : The guaranteed value (MIN) ; equivalent to the total power failure time that is calculated based on the characteristics value of the
memory (SRAM) supplied by the manufacturer and under the storage ambient temperature range of -25°C to 75°C (-13 to
167°F) (operating ambient temperature of 0°C to 55°C (32 to 131°F)).
(Note-4) : The guaranteed value (TYP) ; equivalent to the total power failure time that is calculated based on the normal air-conditioned
environment (40°C (104°F)).
(Note-5) : The actual service value (Reference value) ; equivalent to the total power failure time that is calculated based on the measured
value and under the storage ambient temperature of 25°C (77°F). This value is intended for reference only, as it varies with
characteristics of the memory.
(Note-6) : In the following status, the backup time after power OFF is 3 minutes.
• The Q6BAT lead connector/ Q7BAT lead connector is disconnected.
• Lead wire of Q6BAT/Q7BAT is broken.
(Note-7) : Set the battery (Q6BAT/Q7BAT) to battery holder .

6-8
6 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

POINT
(1) Do not use any battery having exceeded its guaranteed life.
(2) When the battery hours (total power failure time) may exceed its guaranteed
value, take the following measure.
• Perform ROM operation to protect a program even if the battery dies at the
Motion controller power-OFF.
• If SM51 turns on, the contents for the data (Refer to Section 6.5.) of RAM
built-in Motion controller cannot be guaranteed.
It is recommended to back-up the data periodically.
(3) When the total power failure time exceeds its guaranteed value, and SM51,
SM52, SM58 and SM59 turns on, immediately change the battery. Even if the
alarm has not yet occurred, it is recommended to replace the battery
periodically according to operating conditions.
(4) Even when not connect to a motion controller, self-discharge influences the life
of the battery. The battery should be exchanged approximately every 4 or 5
years even if the total power failure time is within the guaranteed value.

6-9
6 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

6.5.2 Battery replacement procedure

(1) Battery replacement procedure of the Battery holder unit

When the battery has been exhausted, replace the battery with a new one in
accordance with the procedure shown below.

POINT
When replacing the battery, pay attention to the following.
(1) Back up the data using MT Developer2 before starting replacement.

(2) First back up data stored in the Motion controller using a personal computer
with MT Developer2 installed. Then replace the battery with a new one. After
setting the battery in the Battery holder unit, use the MT Developer2 "verify"
function to confirm the data on the motion controller has not changed.
In the following status, the backup time after power OFF is 3 minutes.
• The lead connector of Q6BAT/Q7BAT is disconnected.
• The lead wire of Q6BAT/Q7BAT is broken.

Replacing Battery

Turn off the system power supply.

Remove the old battery from its holder.

Install a new battery into the holder in the

correct direction. Connect the lead
connector to the connector (BATTERY).

Set the battery holder to the motion

controller.

Turn on the Motion controller power

supply.

END

6 - 10
6 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

6.5.3 Resuming operation after storing the Motion controller

When operation is to be resumed after the Motion controller has been in storage with
the battery removed or if the battery has died during storage, the contents of
programs, parameters, absolute position data and latch data cannot be guaranteed.
Before resuming operation, write the contents of programs, parameters, absolute
position data and latch data which were backed-up to the motion controller’s SRAM
prior to storage.

POINT
Before placing the motion controller into storage, always back up the contents of
programs, parameters, absolute position data and latch data to the Motion
controller’s SRAM.

6.5.4 Symbol for the new EU Battery Directive

This section describes a symbol for the new EU Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) that
is labeled batteries.

Note: This symbol mark is for EU countries only

This symbol mark is according to the directive 2006/66/EC Article 20 Information for
end-users and Annex II.
Your MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC product is designed and manufactured with high
quality materials and components which can be recycled and/or reused.
This symbol means that batteries and accumulators, at their end-of-life, should be
disposed of separately from your household waste.
If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, this chemical
symbol means that the battery or accumulator contains a heavy metal at a certain
concentration.
This will be indicated as follows:
Hg: mercury (0.0005%), Cd: cadmium (0.002%), Pb: lead (0.004%)
In the European Union there are separate collection systems for used batteries and
accumulators.
Please, dispose of batteries and accumulators correctly at your local community
waste collection/recycling centre.
Please, help us to conserve the environment we live in!

6 - 11
6 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

6.6 Troubleshooting

This section describes the various types of trouble that occur when the system is
operated, and causes and corrective actions of these troubles.

6.6.1 Troubleshooting basics

The basic three points that must be followed in the troubleshooting are as follows.

(1) Visual inspection

Visually check the following.
(a) Movement of machine (stopped condition, operating condition)
(b) Power supply on/off
(c) Status of input/output devices
(d) Installation condition of the Motion controller, SSCNET cable, synchronous
encoder cable.
(e) State of wiring (I/O cables, cables)
(f) Display states of various types of indicators
Motion controller : 7-segment LED (Installation mode, Operation mode,
Battery error, STOP/RUN/RESET, etc.)
(g) Status of setting of various types of switches (Setting of No. of stages of
extension base unit, power interrupt hold-on status).

After checking (a) to (g), monitor the operating conditions of servomotors and
error code using MT Developer2.

(2) Error Check

Check to see how the operating condition varies while the Motion controller is
operated as follows.
(a) Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch of the Motion controller to STOP.
(b) Reset the system with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch of Motion controller.
(c) Cycle the Motion controller power supply.

(3) The above two steps help determine if it is the servo programs or
SFC programs that contain the error.

6 - 12
6 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

6.6.2 Motion Controller Troubleshooting

This section gives error code descriptions and details corrective actions.

(1) Troubleshooting flowchart

The following shows the issues classified into a variety of groups according to the
types of events.

Error-occurrence description

(a)
"POWER" LED turns off
"Flowchart for when "POWER" LED turns off"

" ." does not flash in the first digit of (b)

7-segment LED "Flowchart for when " ." does not flash in the first digit of
7-segment LED"

(c)
"A00" displays on 7-segment LED
"Flowchart for when "A00" displays on 7-segment LED"

"AL" "L01" displays on 7-segment LED (d)

"Flowchart for when "AL" "L01" displays on 7-segment LED"

"AL" "A1" " " displays on 7-segment (e)

LED "Flowchart for when "AL" "A1" " " displays on 7-segment LED"

(f)
"BT " displays on 7-segment LED
"Flowchart for when "BT " displays on 7-segment LED"

(g)
" . . ." displays on 7-segment LED
"Flowchart for when " . . ." displays on 7-segment LED"

(h)
Servo amplifier does not start
"Flowchart for when servo amplifier does not start"

"AL" "S01" displays on 7-segment LED (i)

"Flowchart for when "AL" "S01" displays on 7-segment LED"

6 - 13
6 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

(a) Flowchart for when the "POWER" LED turns off

The following shows the flowchart when the "POWER" LED turns off while
turning on the or during operation.

"POWER" LED turns off

NO
Is there power? Supply power.

YES

NO Does "POWER" YES

LED turn on?

Is the wiring/ NO Connect wiring and fix terminal

terminal connection
connection correctly.
correct?

YES

NO Does "POWER" YES

LED turn on?

Is the power NO
supply voltage within the The supply voltage should be within
rated range? the rated range.

YES

NO Does "POWER" YES

LED turn on?

1)

END

6 - 14
6 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

1)

Remove internal I/F connector.

Does "POWER" YES

LED turn on?

NO

A manual pulser or a synchronous

encoder break down.
the cable is disconnected.
(A normal manual pulser or normal
synchronous encoders are exchanged.)

YES
Does "POWER"
LED turn on?

NO

H/W fault
Check operation in the order starting
END
with the minimum system.
If the module will not work, explain
the error symptom and get advice
from out sales representative for the
modules with failure.

6 - 15
6 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

(b) Flowchart for when " ." does not flash in the first digit of
7-segment LED

" ." does not flash in the first digit of

7-segment LED.

Does "POWER" NO (a)

LED turn on? "Flowchart for when "POWER" LED
turns off"

YES

"RESET"
Is the
RUN/STOP/RESET Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch
switch set to STOP? to "STOP"

"STOP"

NO Does " . " flash YES

in the first digit of 7-segment
LED?

H/W fault
Check operation in the order starting END
with the minimum system.
If the module will not work, explain
the error symptom and get advice
from out sales representative for the (Note) : Normally, " . " flashes in the first digit of
modules with failure. 7-segment LED.

6 - 16
6 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

(c) Flowchart for when "A00" displays on 7-segment LED

"A00" displays when the operating system software is not installed.

The following shows the flowchart when the "A00" displays at the power
supply ON or operation start.

"A00" displays on 7-segment LED

Is the
operating system NO
software installed to Motion
controller?

YES Install the operating system software.

Reset the Motion controller.

Does "A00" disappear NO

on 7-segment LED?

YES

END Explain the error symptom and get

advice from out sales representative.

6 - 17
6 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

(d) Flowchart for when "AL" "L01" displays on 7-segment LED

"AL" (flashes 3 times) Steady "L01" display" displays at the system

setting error occurrence.
The following shows the flowchart when the "AL" (flashes 3 times)
Steady "L01" display" displays during operation.

"AL" "L01" displays on 7-segment

LED.

Confirm details of error by Motion

controller error batch monitor of
MT Developer2.

Does a ROM ERROR YES

occur?

NO
NO
Is ROM operation executed?

YES

Set a rotary switch1 (SW1) to "0", a Set a rotary switch1 (SW1) to "0", a
rotary switch2 (SW2) to "6" of Motion rotary switch2 (SW2) to "0" of Motion
controller, and then execute ROM controller.
writing. (Mode operated by RAM)

Reset the Motion controller.

Does "A00" "L01" NO

disappear on 7-segment
LED?

YES

END

6 - 18
6 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

(e) Flowchart for when "AL" "A1" " " displays on 7-segment
LED.
""AL" (flashes 3 times) Steady "A1" display " "" displays at the self-
diagnosis error occurrence.
: 4-digits error code is displayed in two sequential flashes of 2-digits each.

"AL" "L01" " " displays

on 7-segment LED.

Confirm details of error by Motion

controller error batch monitor of
MT Developer2.

NO
Noise cause?

YES

Take measures against noise.

Explain the error symptom and get

advice from out sales representative.

Reset the Motion controller.

Does "AL" "L01" NO

" " disappear on 7-segment
LED.

YES

END

6 - 19
6 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

(f) Flowchart for when "BT " displays on 7-segment LED

"BT1" or "BT2" displays when the battery voltage is lowered.

"BT1" or "BT2" displays at the following cases.
• BT1: Battery voltage 2.7V or less
• BT2: Battery voltage 2.5V or less
The following shows the flowchart for when "BT " displays.

"BT " displays on 7-segment LED

Turn off the Motion controller

power supply.

Replace the battery.

Turn on the Motion controller

power supply.

Does "BT "

disappear on 7-segment NO (SM58 or SM51 ON)
LED (Confirm ON/OFF by
monitoring SM )

YES (SM58, SM51 OFF)

END
H/W fault
Explain the error symptom and get
advice from out sales representative.

REMARK
If SM51,SM58 turns on, the contents for the data (Refer to Section 6.5.) of RAM
built-in Motion controller cannot be guaranteed.
It is recommended to back-up the battery periodically.

6 - 20
6 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

(g) Flowchart for when " . . ." displays on 7-segment LED

" . . ." displays at the WDT error occurrence.

The following shows the flowchart for when " . . ." displays on 7-segment
LED during operation.

" . . ." displays on 7-segment LED

Confirm details of error by Motion

controller error batch monitor of
MT Developer2.

Is the error NO
code of Motion controller WDT
cause "1"?

YES
Is the error NO
code of Motion controller WDT
cause "2"?
Correct the main cycle not to exceed
1.0[s] by the following methods, and
write it to Motion controller. YES
Is the error NO
1) Change the operation cycle to
code of Motion controller WDT
large value in the system setting.
cause "301"?
2) Reduce the number of execution to Correct the Motion operating time to
the event task program in the shorten by the following methods,
Motion SFC program. and write it to Motion controller.
3) Reduce the number of execution to 1) Change the operation cycle to YES
the normal task program executed large value in the system setting.
simultaneously 2) Reduce the number of execution to Correct the servo program so that the
in the Motion SFC program. the event task program in the number of CPSTART instructions of
Motion SFC program. 8 or more points should not exceed
the number of simultaneous startable
programs (14 or less), and write it to
Motion controller.

Reset the Motion controller.

Does " . . ." disappear NO

on 7-segment LED.

YES

END
Explain the error symptom and get
advice from out sales representative.

6 - 21
6 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

(h) Flowchart for when servo amplifier does not start

The following shows the flowchart for when servo amplifier does not start.
Servo amplifier does not start.

Is there error display NO

on 7-segment LED of Motion Remove the error cause.
controller?

YES NO YES
Does servo amplifier start?

Has
NO the control power supply of servo
the control power supply
of servo amplifier amplifier turn on.
turn on?

YES
NO YES
Does servo amplifier start?

Is the connection of NO
SSCNET cable correct? Connect the SSCNET cable correctly.

YES
NO YES
Does servo amplifier start?

Is the axis select NO Set the axis select rotary switch in "0",
rotary switch of servo amplifier turn on the power supply of the
correct? servo amplifier.

YES
NO YES
Does servo amplifier start?

Explain the error symptom and get END

advice from out sales representative.

6 - 22
6 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

(i) Flowchart for when "AL" "S01" displays on 7-segment LED

""AL" (flashes 3 times) Steady "S01" display" displays at the servo error
occurrence.
The following shows the flowchart for when "AL" (flashes 3 times)
Steady "S01" display" displays on 7-segment LED during operation.

"AL" "S01" displays on 7-segment

LED.

Confirm details of error by Motion

CPU error batch monitor of
MT Developer2.

Remove the error cause of servo

amplifier, and then execute the servo
error reset (M3208+20n ON) or
re-turn on the servo amplifier power
supply.

Does "AL" "S01" NO

disappear on
7-segment LED?

YES

END

6 - 23
6 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

6.6.3 Confirming error code

The error code and error message can be read using MT Developer2.
The procedure for reading error is as follows.

(1) Connect a computer to the PERIPHERAL I/F of the Motion controller.

(2) Start MT Developer2.
(3) Select [Online] - [Read from CPU] Menu of MT Developer2, and read the project
data from Motion controller.
(4) Start the monitor screen of MT Developer2 and select [Motion CPU error batch
monitor] menu.
(5) Confirm the error codes and error messages displayed on screen.

Refer to help of MT Developer2 for details of operating method.

6 - 24
6 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

6.6.4 I/O circuit troubleshooting

This section describes possible problems with I/O circuits and their corrective actions.

(1) Input circuit troubleshooting

The following describes possible problems with input circuits and their corrective
actions.

Input Circuit Troubleshooting and Corrective Action

Condition Cause Corrective action
• Drive by switch with LED indicator. • Connect an appropriate resistor so that the
current across the Motion controller
becomes lower than the off current.
DC input
DC input (plus common)
Example 1

Input signal (plus common)

is not Motion
Motion Resistor R
turned Leakage controller
OFF. current controller

(Note-1) : A calculation example of the

resistance to be connected is
shown below.
• Sneak path due to the use of two power • Use only one power supply.
supplies. • Connect a sneak path prevention diode.
(Figure below)
Example 2

Input signal
is not
Motion Motion
turned
E1 E2 controller E1 E2 controller
OFF.

E1 E2

<Calculation example of Example 1>

If a switch with LED display is connected to MR-MQ100, and current of 4 [mA] is
leaked.
/4/3

.GCMCIGEWTTGPV
=O#? +PRWVOQFWNG

=Mǡ? =8&%?

(a) Because the condition for OFF voltage (0.9[mA]) of MR-MQ100 is not
satisfied. Connect a resistor as shown below.
/4/3
=O#?
+<O#
+4=O#? 4 <
+PRWVKORGFCPEG
=Mǡ?
=Mǡ?
=8&%?

6 - 25
6 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

(b) Calculate the connecting resistor value R as indicated below.

To satisfy the 0.9 [mA] OFF current of the MR-MQ100, the resistor R to be
connected may be the one where 3.1 [mA] or more will flow.
IR : IZ=Z(Input impedance):R
IZ 0.9
R d u Z(Input impedance ) u 5.6 u 10 3 1625[:]
IR 3.1
R<1625 [ ].
Assuming that resistor R is 1500 [ ], the power capacity W of resistor R is:

W = (Input voltage)2 ÷ R = 26.42 ÷ 1500 = 0.464 [W]

(c) The power capacity of the resistor selected is 3 to 5 times greater than the
actual current consumption. 1.5K [ ], 2 to 3 [W] resistor may therefore be
connected to the terminal in question.

(2) Output circuit troubleshooting

The following describes possible problems with output circuits and their
corrective actions.
It can drive lamp, relay or photo coupler. Install a diode (D) for an inductive load
(relay etc.), or install an inrush current suppressing resistor (R) for a lamp load.
(Permissible current: 40mA or less, inrush current: 100mA or less) A maximum
of 2.6V voltage drop occurs in the Motion controller.

(a) Circuit example of sink output

+HRQNCTKV[QHFKQFG
KUTGXGTUGFOQVKQP
EQPVTQNNGTYKNNHCKN

.QCF

8&%r㧑

(b) Circuit example of source output

+HRQNCTKV[QHFKQFG
KUTGXGTUGFOQVKQP
EQPVTQNNGTYKNNHCKN

.QCF

8&%r㧑

CAUTION
Do not mistake the polarity and " + / - " of diode, as this may lead to destruction or damage.

6 - 26
7 POSITIONING DEDICATED SIGNALS

7. POSITIONING DEDICATED SIGNALS

The device list that can be used with the Motion controller is shown below.

7.1 Device List

The range of devices that can be used is shown below.

Device Numeric
Class Type Device Name Points Setting range Latch
Code Expressions
Input X 16 8192 X0 to X1FFF Not available
Output Y 16 8192 Y0 to Y1FFF Not available
Actual input PX 16 4 (Note-1) PX0 to PXFFF Not available
Actual output PY 16 2 (Note-2) PY0 to PYFFF Not available
Bit internal relay 8192 Latch range setting
M 10 M0 to M8191
device (User area) (Note-3)
internal relay
M 10 4096 M8192 to M12287 Not available
(System area)
Link relay B 16 8192 B0 to B1FFF Latch range setting
Internal
Annunciator F 10 2048 F0 to F2047 Latch range setting
device
Latch range setting
8192
Data register D 10 D0 to D8191 (Motion dedicated
(Note-3)
device)
Link register W 16 8192 W0 to W1FFF Latch range setting
Word
Motion register
device # 10 7912 #0 to #7911 Available
(User area)
Motion register
Not available
(System area) # 10 4376 #7912 to #12287 7
(Note-5)
(Note-4)
Bit 2256
Special relay SM 10 SM0 to SM2255 Not available
device (Note-6)
System
2256
device Word Special register SD 10 SD0 to SD2255 Not available
(Note-7)
device
Coasting Timer FT - 1 FT (888μs) Not available
(Note-1): Actual input (PX) is every 16 points. Actual input (X) is 4 points, and the dummy is 12 points.
Dummy devices cannot be used. These are fixed as "0".
(Note-2): Actual output (PY) is every 16 points. Actual output (Y) is 2 points, and the dummy is 14 points.
Dummy devices cannot be used. These are fixed as "0".
<example>
When starting I/O number is 10(H) : PX10 to PX13 Actual input, PX14 to PX1F (Not Available).
PY10 to PY11 Actual output, PY12 to PY1F (Not Available).
(Note-3): Including Motion dedicated devices.
(Note-4): These devices are used by the system.
(Note-5): The latch of "Motion device(#8640 to #8735)" is available.
(Note-6): SM2000 to SM2255 : Not available
(Note-7): SD2000 to SD2255 : Not available

7-1
7 POSITIONING DEDICATED SIGNALS

7.2 Internal relays

The available numbers of axes are below.

Real mode : 1 axis
Virtual mode: Virtual axes=8, Output axis=1, Synchronous encoder=1

7.2.1 Internal relay list

Device No. Purpose Remark

M0 User device
to (2000 points)
M2000 Common device
to (320 points)
M2320 Not available
to (80 points)

M2400 Axis status Real mode : Axis status

to (20 points u 1 axis) Virtual mode : Output module
M2420 Not available
to (652 points)
M3072 Common device
to (64 points)
M3136 Not available
to (64 points)

M3200 Axis command signal Real mode : Axis status

to (20 points u 1 axis) Virtual mode : Output module
M3220 Not available
to (780 points)
M4000 Virtual servomotor axis status (Note-1),(Note-2),(Note-4)
to (20 points u 8 axes)
M4160 Not available
to (480 points)
M4640 Synchronous encoder axis status (Note-2)
to (4 points u 1 axis)
M4644 Not available
to (156 points)
M4800 Virtual servomotor axis command signal (Note-1),(Note-2),(Note-4)
to (20 points u 8 axes)
M4960 Not available
to (480 points)
M5440 Synchronous encoder axis command signal (Note-2)
to (4 points u 1 axis)
M5444 Not available
to (44 points)
M5488
User device
to
(2704 points)
M8191

7-2
7 POSITIONING DEDICATED SIGNALS

Device No. Purpose Remark

M8192
Not available
to
(4096 points)
M12287
It can be used as an user device.

(Note-1) : It can be used as a user device in real mode only.

(Note-2) : Do not set "M4000 to M5487" as the latch range in Virtual mode.
(Note-3) : "Cam axis command signals" and "Smoothing clutch complete signals" can be set to the parameters of any device.
(Note-4) : Only the area of the axis set in Mechanical System Program is occupied. The area which is not used in Mechanical
System Program can be used by users.

POINT
(1) Total number of user device points.
4704 points
(2) This manual explains only the data registers that are used in Virtual mode.
Refer to "Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller (SV13/SV22)
Programming Manual (REAL MODE)" for information regarding other data
registers.

7-3
7 POSITIONING DEDICATED SIGNALS

7.2.2 Axis status list

Refer to "Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller (SV13/SV22) Programming

Manual (REAL MODE)" for details.

Axis
Device No. Signal name
No.
M2400
1 to Signal
Signal name Refresh cycle Fetch cycle
M2419 direction
0 Positioning start complete
1 Positioning complete
2 In-position
3 Command in-position Operation cycle
4 Speed controlling
5 Speed/position switching latch
Status
6 Zero pass
signal
7 error detection Immediate
8 Servo error detection Operation cycle
9 Home position return request Main cycle
10 Home position return complete Operation cycle
11 FLS
Main cycle
12 External RLS
13 signals Unusable — — —
14 DOG/CHANGE Main cycle
Status
15 Servo ready
Operation cycle signal
16 torque limiting
17 Unusable — — —
Virtual mode continuation operation
18 (Note-1) At virtual mode transition Status
disable warning signal
signal
19 M-code outputting signal Operation cycle

(Note-1) : It is unusable in the real mode.

7-4
7 POSITIONING DEDICATED SIGNALS

7.2.3 Axis command signal list

Refer to "Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller (SV13/SV22) Programming

Manual (REAL MODE)" for details.

Axis No. Device No. Signal name

1 M3200 to M3219
Signal
Signal name Refresh cycle Fetch cycle
direction
0 Stop command
Operation cycle
1 Rapid stop command
2 Forward rotation JOG start command
Command
3 Reverse rotation JOG start command Main cycle
signal
4 Complete signal OFF command
Speed/position switching enable
5 Operation cycle
command
6 Unusable
7 Error reset command
Main cycle
8 Servo error reset command Command
External stop input disable at start signal
9 At start
command
10
Unusable
11
Feed current value update request
12 At start
command
Address clutch reference setting
13 (Note-1)
command (SV22 only) At virtual mode Command
Cam reference position setting transition signal
14 (Note-1)
command (SV22 only)
15 Servo OFF command Operation cycle
(Note-2)
16 Gain changing command Operation cycle
17 Unusable
18 Control loop changing command Command
Operation cycle
19 FIN signal signal

(Note-1): It is unusable in the real mode.

(Note-2): Operation cycle 7.1[ms] or more: Every 3.5[ms]

7-5
7 POSITIONING DEDICATED SIGNALS

7.2.4 Virtual servomotor axis status list

Refer to "Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller (SV13/SV22) Programming

Manual (VIRTUAL MODE)" for details.
Axis No. Device No. Signal name
1 M4000 to M4019
2 M4020 to M4039 Virtual
3 M4040 to M4059 Refresh Fetch Signal
Signal name Real Ball Rotary
4 M4060 to M4079 Roller Cam cycle cycle direction
screw table
5 M4080 to M4099
6 M4100 to M4119 0 Positioning start complete Operation Status
Backup
7 M4120 to M4139 1 Positioning complete cycle signal
8 M4140 to M4159 2 Unusable
3 Command in-position Operation Status
Backup
4 Speed controlling cycle signal
5
Unusable
6
Immedi- Status
7 Error detection Backup
ately signal
8
9
10
11
12
13 Unusable — — — — —
14
15
16
17
18
Operation Status
19 M-code outputting signal Backup
cycle signal
: Valid

POINT
(1) Axes 1 to 8 can be set as a Virtual axis. (Up to 3 axes can be used)

REMARK
In the positioning dedicated signals, "n" in "M4007+20n", etc. indicates a value
corresponding to axis No. such as the following table.
Axis No. n Axis No. n Axis No. n
1 0 2 1 3 2

• Calculate as follows for the device No. corresponding to each axis.

M4007+20n (error detection )=M4007+20 2=M4047

7-6
7 POSITIONING DEDICATED SIGNALS

7.2.5 Virtual servomotor axis command signal list

Refer to "Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller (SV13/SV22) Programming

Manual (VIRTUAL MODE)" for details.
Axis No. Device No. Signal name
1 M4800 to M4819
2 M4820 to M4839 Virtual
3 M4840 to M4859 Refresh Fetch Signal
Signal name Real Ball Rotary
4 M4860 to M4879 Roller Cam cycle cycle direction
screw table
5 M4880 to M4899
6 M4900 to M4919 0 Stop command Operation
7 M4920 to M4939 1 Rapid stop command cycle
8 M4940 to M4959 Forward rotation JOG
2
start command
Reverse rotation JOG Main
3
start command cycle
Complete signal OFF
4
command
5
Unusable
6
Main Command
7 Error reset command
cycle signal
8 Unusable
External stop input
Command
9 disable at start At start
signal
command
10
11
12
13
14 Unusable
15
16
17
18
Operation Command
19 FIN signal
cycle signal
: Valid, : Invalid

POINT
(1) Axes 1 to 8 can be set as a Virtual axis. (Up to 3 axes can be used)

7-7
7 POSITIONING DEDICATED SIGNALS

7.2.6 Synchronous encoder axis status list

Refer to "Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller (SV13/SV22) Programming

Manual (VIRTUAL MODE)" for details.

Axis No. Device No. Signal name

1 M4640 to M4643
Signal
Signal name Real Virtual Refresh cycle Fetch cycle
direction
0 Error detection Immediately Status
1 Unusable
Virtual mode continuation operation Status
2 Main cycle
disable warning signal
3 Unusable
: Valid

7.2.7 Synchronous encoder axis command signal list

Axis No. Device No. Signal name

1 M5440 to M5443
Signal
Signal name Real Virtual Refresh cycle Fetch cycle
direction
Status
0 Error reset Main cycle
signal
1
2 Unusable
3
: Valid, : Invalid

7-8
7 POSITIONING DEDICATED SIGNALS

7.2.8 Common device list

Refer to "Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller (SV13/SV22) Programming

Manual (REAL MODE)" for details.
Device Signal Remark Device Signal Remark
Signal name Refresh cycle Fetch cycle Signal name Refresh cycle Fetch cycle
No. direction (Note-4) No. direction (Note-4)

Command
M2000 PLC ready flag Main cycle M3072 M2053 Unusable — — — —
signal
M2001 Axis 1 Status
M2054 Operation cycle over flag Operation cycle
M2002 Axis 2 signal
M2003 Axis 3 Status M2055
M2004 Axis 4 signal M2056
Start accept flag Operation cycle
M2005 Axis 5 (Note-1), M2057 Unusable
— — — —
M2006 Axis 6 (Note-2) M2058 (6 points)
M2007 Axis 7 M2059
M2008 Axis 8 M2060
M2009 M2061 Axis 1
M2010 M2062 Axis 2
M2011 M2063 Axis 3 Status
M2012 M2064 Axis 4 Speed changing signal
Operation cycle
M2013 M2065 Axis 5 accepting flag (Note-1),
M2014 M2066 Axis 6 (Note-2)

M2015 M2067 Axis 7

M2016 M2068 Axis 8
M2017 M2069
M2018 M2070
M2019 M2071
M2020 Unusable M2072
— — —
M2021 (24 points) M2073
M2022 M2074
M2023 M2075
M2024 M2076
M2025 M2077
M2026 M2078
M2027 M2079
M2028 M2080 Unusable
— — — —
M2029 M2081 (24 points)
M2030 M2082
M2031 M2083
M2032 M2084
M2033 Unusable M2085
— — — —
M2034 (2 points) M2086
Motion error history clear Command M2087
M2035 Main cycle M3080
request flag signal M2088
M2036 Unusable M2089
— — — —
M2037 (2 points) M2090
At debugging mode M2091
M2038 Motion SFC debugging flag Status
transition M2092
signal
M2039 Motion error detection flag Immediate M2093
M2094
Speed switching point specified Command
M2040 At start M3073 M2095
flag signal
M2096 Unusable
— — — —
Status M2097 (8 points)
M2041 System setting error flag Operation cycle
signal M2098
M2042 All axes servo ON command Operation cycle M3074 M2099
Command
Real mode/virtual mode At virtual mode M2100
M2043 signal M3075
switching request (SV22) transition M2101 Axis 1
Real mode/virtual mode M2102 Axis 2 Synchronous
M2044
switching status (SV22) M2103 Axis 3 encoder current Status
Real mode/virtual mode At virtual mode M2104 Axis 4 value changing flag signal
Operation cycle
M2045 switching error detection transition Status M2105 Axis 5 (Note-3) (Note-1),
signal (SV22) signal M2106 Axis 6 (Note-2)

M2046 Out-of-sync warning (SV22) M2107 Axis 7 (12 axes)

M2108 Axis 8
M2047 Motion slot fault detection flag Operation cycle
M2109
M2110 Unusable
JOG operation simultaneous Command — — — —
M2048 Main cycle M3076 M2111 (4 Points)
start command signal
M2112
Status
M2049 All axes servo ON accept flag Operation cycle M2113
signal
M2050 Unusable — — — — M2114
Unusable
Manual pulse generator 1 Command M2115 — — — —
M2051 Main cycle M3077 (6 points)
enable flag signal M2116
M2117
M2052 Unusable — — — —
M2118

7-9
7 POSITIONING DEDICATED SIGNALS

Common device list (Continued)

Device Signal Remark Device Signal Remark
Signal name Refresh cycle Fetch cycle Signal name Refresh cycle Fetch cycle
No. direction (Note-4) No. direction (Note-4)

M2119 M2188
M2120 M2189
M2121 M2190
M2122 M2191
Unusable
M2123 — — — — M2192
(9 points)
M2124 M2193
M2125 M2194
M2126 M2195
M2127 M2196
M2128 Axis 1 M2197
M2129 Axis 2 M2198
M2130 Axis 3 Status M2199
M2131 Axis 4 Automatic signal M2200
Operation cycle
M2132 Axis 5 decelerating flag (Note-1), M2201
M2133 Axis 6 (Note-2) M2202
M2134 Axis 7 M2203
M2135 Axis 8 M2204
Unusable
M2136 M2205
(36 points) — — — —
M2137 M2206
(Note-5)
M2138 M2207
M2139 M2208
M2140 M2209
M2141 M2210
M2142 M2211
M2143 M2212
M2144 M2213
M2145 M2214
M2146 M2215
M2147 Unusable M2216
— — — —
M2148 (24 Points) M2217
M2149 M2218
M2150 M2219
M2151 M2220
M2152 M2221
M2153 M2222
M2154 M2223
M2155 M2224
M2156 M2225
M2157 M2226
M2158 M2227
M2159 M2228
M2160 M2229
M2161 M2230
M2162 M2231 Unusable
— — — —
M2163 M2232 (16 points)
M2164 M2233
M2165 M2234
M2166 M2235
M2167 M2236
M2168 M2237
M2169 M2238
M2170 M2239
M2171 M2240 Axis 1
M2172 M2241 Axis 2
Unusable
M2173 M2242 Axis 3 Status
(28 points) — — — —
M2174 M2243 Axis 4 Speed change "0" signal
(Note-5) Operation cycle
M2175 M2244 Axis 5 accepting flag (Note-1),
(Note-2)
M2176 M2245 Axis 6
M2177 M2246 Axis 7
M2178 M2247 Axis 8
M2179 M2248
M2180 M2249
M2181 M2250
M2182 M2251
Unusable
M2183 M2252 — — — —
(㧥 points)
M2184 M2253
M2185 M2254
M2186 M2255
M2187 M2256

7 - 10
7 POSITIONING DEDICATED SIGNALS

Common device list (Continued)

Device Signal Remark Device Signal Remark
Signal name Refresh cycle Fetch cycle Signal name Refresh cycle Fetch cycle
No. direction (Note-4) No. direction (Note-4)

M2257 M2289
M2258 M2290
M2259 M2291
M2260 M2292
M2261 M2293
M2262 M2294
M2263 M2295
Unusable Unusable
M2264 — — — — M2296 — — — —
(㧥 points) (15 points)
M2265 M2297
M2266 M2298
M2267 M2299
M2268 M2300
M2269 M2301
M2270 M2302
M2271 M2303
Status
Control loop
M2272 Axis 1 Operation cycle signal M2304
monitor status
(Note-2)
M2273 M2305
M2274 M2306
M2275 M2307
M2276 M2308
M2277 M2309
M2278 M2310 Unusable
— — — —
M2279 M2311 (16 points)
M2280 Unusable M2312
— — — —
M2281 (16 points) M2313
M2282 M2314
M2283 M2315
M2284 M2316
M2285 M2317
M2286 M2318
M2287 M2319
M2288

(Note-1): Axes 1 to 8 can be set as a Virtual axis. (Up to 3 axes can be used).
Axis 1 can be set as a Real axis.
(Note-2): Device areas for axis9 or larger cannot be used with the MR-MQ100 .
(Note-3): This signal is unusable in real mode.
(Note-4): The device shown in the remark column can also be used.
(Note-5): These devices can be used for clutch statuses.
The clutch status can also be set as the optional device at the clutch parameter.
(Note-6): The devices in the shaded region cannot be used.

7 - 11
7 POSITIONING DEDICATED SIGNALS

7.2.9 Common device list (Command device)

Refer to "Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller (SV13/SV22) Programming

Manual (REAL MODE)" for details.

Remark
Device No. Signal name Refresh cycle Fetch cycle Signal direction (Note-1), (Note-2)

M3072 PLC ready flag Main cycle M2000

M3073 Speed switching point specified flag At start M2040

Operation
M3074 All axes servo ON command cycle M2042
Command
Real mode/virtual mode switching At virtual mode signal
M3075 M2043
request (SV22) transition
JOG operation simultaneous start
M3076 M2048
command Main cycle
M3077 Manual pulse generator 1 enable flag M2051

M3078 Unusable
— — — —
M3079 (2 points)

Command
M3080 Motion error history clear request flag Main cycle M2035
signal
M3081
(Note-3)
Unusable
to — — — —
(55 points)
M3135

(Note-1): The state of a device is not in agreement when the device of a remark column is turned ON/OFF directly. In addition,
when the request from a data register and the request from the above device are performed simultaneously, the request
from the above device becomes effective.
(Note-2): Refer to the explanation of the point column.
(Note-3): Do not use as a user device. It can be used as a device that performs automatic refresh because of area for the reserve
of command signal.

POINT
When the common devices (M3072 to M3080) turn to ON (OFF), the devices in
REMARKS will turn to ON (OFF).
And, it can also be turned ON/OFF by the data register.

7 - 12
7 POSITIONING DEDICATED SIGNALS

7.3 Data Registers

7.3.1 Data register list

Real Virtual
Device No. Purpose Remark
mode mode
Real mode : Axis status
D0 Axis monitor device
Virtual mode : Output
to (20 points) module
D20 Not available
— —
to (620 points)
D640 Control change register Real mode : Axis status
to (2 points u 8 axes) Virtual mode : Output module
D656 Not available
— —
to (48 points)
D704 Common device
to (54 points)
D758 Not available
— —
to (42 points)
Virtual servomotor axis monitor device
(6 points u 8 axes) +
D800 (6 points u 24 axes) Not available
Back up
to Current value after virtual servomotor axis
main shafts differential gear
(4 points u 8 axes)
D880 Not available
— —
to (240 points )
synchronous encoder axis monitor device (Note-1)
(6 points)
D1120 Synchronous encoder axis
to Current value after synchronous encoder axis
Back up
main shafts differential gear
(4 points)
D1130 Not available
— —
to (110 points )
D1240 CAM axis monitor device
Back up
to (10 points u 1 axis)
D1250 Not available
— —
to (310 points )
D1560
User device
to
(6632 points)
D8191
: Valid

7 - 13
7 POSITIONING DEDICATED SIGNALS

POINT
(1) Total number of points for the user devices
6632 points
(2) (Note-1) : Current value of synchronous encoder is updated in Real mode.
(3) This manual describes only details for data registers used in the virtual mode. If it
is required, refer to the "Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller (SV13/SV22)
Programming Manual (REAL MODE)".

7 - 14
7 POSITIONING DEDICATED SIGNALS

7.3.2 Axis monitor device list

Refer to "Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller (SV13/SV22) Programming

Manual (REAL MODE)" for details.

Axis
Device No. Signal name
No.
1 D0 to D19
Signal
Signal name Real Virtual Refresh cycle Unit
direction
0 Feed current value/
1 roller cycle speed Command
2 unit
Real current value Operation cycle
3
4
Deviation counter value PLS
5
6 Minor error code
Immediate
7 Major error code
8 Servo error code Main cycle
Monitor
Home position return
9 PLS device
re-travel value
Backup Operation cycle
10 Travel value after Command
11 proximity dog ON unit
12 Execute program No. At start

13 M-code
Operation cycle
14 Torque limit value %
Data set pointer for At start/during
15
constant-speed control start
16 (Note-1)
Unusable
17
18 Real current value at Command Monitor
Backup Operation cycle
19 stop input unit device
: Valid, : Invalid

(Note-1): It can be used as the travel value change register. The travel value change register can be set to the device optionally in the servo
program.

7 - 15
7 POSITIONING DEDICATED SIGNALS

7.3.3 Control change register list

Refer to "Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller (SV13/SV22) Programming

Manual (REAL MODE)" for details.
Axis
Device No. Signal name
No.
1 D640, D641
2 D642, D643 Signal
Signal name Real Virtual Fetch cycle Unit
3 D644, D645 direction
4 D646, D647 0 Command Command
JOG speed setting At start
5 D648, D649 1 unit device
6 D650, D651 : Valid, : Invalid
7 D652, D653
8 D654, D655

POINT
(1) Only axis 1 can be set as a real mode. Axes 1 to 8 can be set as a virtual servo
motor axis. (Up to 3 axes can be used)

7 - 16
7 POSITIONING DEDICATED SIGNALS

7.3.4 Virtual servomotor axis monitor device list

Refer to "Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller (SV13/SV22) Programming

Manual (VIRTUAL MODE)" for details.
Axis No. Device No. Signal name
1 D800 to D809
2 D810 to D819
3 D820 to D829 Refresh Fetch Signal
Signal name Real Virtual
4 D830 to D839 cycle cycle direction
5 D840 to D849
6 D850 to D859 0 Operation
Feed current value
7 D860 to D869 1 cycle
8 D870 to D879 2 Minor error code
Immediately
3 Major error code
4 Execute program No. At start
5 M-code Monitor
Backup
6 Current value after virtual device
servomotor axis main
7 Operation
shaft's differential gear
cycle
8 Error search output axis No.
Data set pointer for
9
constant-speed control
: Valid, : Invalid

POINT
(1) Axes 1 to 8 can be set as a virtual servo motor axis. (Up to 3 axes can be used)

7 - 17
7 POSITIONING DEDICATED SIGNALS

7.3.5 Synchronous encoder axis monitor device list

Refer to "Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller (SV13/SV22) Programming

Manual (VIRTUAL MODE)" for details.
Axis No. Device No. Signal name
1 D1120 to D1129
Refresh Signal
Signal name Real Virtual Fetch cycle
cycle direction
0 Operation
Current value
1 cycle Monitor
2 Minor error code device
Backup Immediately
3 Major error code
4
Unusable
5
6 Current value after synchronous encoder
Operation Monitor
7 axis main shaft's differential gear Backup
cycle device
8 Error search output axis No.
9 Unusable
: Valid

7.3.6 Cam axis monitor device list

Refer to "Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller (SV13/SV22) Programming

Manual (VIRTUAL MODE)" for details.
Axis No. Device No. Signal name
1 D1240 to D1249
Refresh Signal
Signal name Real Virtual Fetch cycle
cycle direction
0 Unusable
1 Execute cam No.
2
Execute stroke amount Operation Monitor
3 Backup
cycle device
4 Current value within 1 cam shaft
5 revolution
6
7
Unusable
8
9
: Valid

POINT
(1) Axes 1 to 8 can be set as a virtual servo motor axis. (Up to 3 axes can be used)

7 - 18
7 POSITIONING DEDICATED SIGNALS

7.3.7 Common device list

Refer to "Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller (SV13/SV22) Programming

Manual (REAL MODE)" for details.
Device Signal Device Signal
Signal name Refresh cycle Fetch cycle Signal name Refresh cycle Fetch cycle
No. direction No. direction
Manual pulse generator 1 At the manual pulse
Command
D704 PLC ready flag request D752 smoothing magnification generator enable flag
device
setting register
Speed switching point
D705 D753
specified flag request
Command Unusable — — —
All axes servo ON command Main cycle
D706 device D754
request
Real mode/virtual mode Manual pulse generator 1
D707 D755 Main cycle
switching request (SV22) enable flag request
JOG operation simultaneous
D708 D756
start command request Unusable — — —
D709 Unusable — — — D757
D710 D758
D711 JOG operation simultaneous D759
At start
D712 start axis setting register D760
D713 Command D761
D714 device D762
At the manual pulse
Manual pulse generator axis
generator enable flag
D715 1 No. setting register D763

D716 D764
D717 D765
Unusable — — —
D718 D766
D719 D767
Manual pulse
generators 1 pulse At the manual pulse
Command
D720 Axis 1 input magnification  generator enable flag D768
device
setting register
(Note-1), (Note-2)

D721 D769
D722 D770
D723 D771
D724 D772
D725 D773
D726 D774
D727 D775
Unusable
D728 D776 — — —
(42 points)
D729 D777
D730 D778
D731 D779
D732 D780
D733 D781
D734 D782
D735 D783
D736 Unusable — — — D784
D737 D785
D738 D786
D739 D787
D740 D788
D741 D789
D742 D790
D743 D791
D744 D792
D745 D793
D746 D794
D747 D795
D748 D796
D749 D797
D750 D798
D751 D799

7 - 19
7 POSITIONING DEDICATED SIGNALS

7.4 Motion registers

The motion registers (#0 to #12287) are available as the Motion controller-dedicated
devices.
they can be used in operation control(F/FS) program or transition (G) programs.

Motion device Item Specifications

Motion register (#) Number of points 12288 points (#0 to #12287)

Data size 16-bit/points
Latch Only a user device is latched.
Usable tasks Normal, event
Access Read and write enabled in whole range

7.4.1 Motion registers list

Device No. Purpose

#0 User devices
to (7912 points)
#7912 Mark detection setting devices
to (88 points)
#8000 Monitor devices2
to (20 points u 1 axis)
#8020 Not available
to (620 points)
#8640 Motion error history devices
to (96 points)
#8736 Not available
to (160 points)
#8896 Mark detection monitor devices
to (320 points)
#9216
Not available
to
(3072 points)
#12287

7 - 20
7 POSITIONING DEDICATED SIGNALS

7.4.2 Axis monitor device 2

Information for the axis is stored in the monitor devices.

Refer to "Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller (SV13/SV22) Programming
Manual (REAL MODE)" for details.

Axis
Device No. Signal name
No.
1 #8000 to #8019
Signal
Signal name signal description Refresh cycle
direction
0 : Unused
256 : MR-J3-B
257 : MR-J3-B (Fully When the servo amplifier
0 Servo amplifier type
closed loop control) power-on
258 : MR-J3-B ( Linear)
263 : MR-J3-B ( DD motor)
1 Motor current 0.1[%] Operation cycle 1.7[ms] or Monitor
2 less: Operation cycle device
3 Motor speed 0.1[r/min] Operation cycle 3.5[ms] or
more: 3.5[ms]
4
Command speed [PLS/s] Operation cycle
5
6 Home position return re-travel At home position return re-
7 value (Real mode only) travel
8
9
10
11
12
13
Unusable
14
15
16
17
18
19

7 - 21
7 POSITIONING DEDICATED SIGNALS

7.4.3 Motion error history devices

The Motion error history devices are shown below.

Refer to "Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller (SV13/SV22)
Programming Manual (REAL MODE)" for details.

Signal direction Refresh Fetch

Device No. Signal name
Status Command cycle cycle

Seventh error information in past

#8640 to #8651
(oldest error information )
#8652 to #8663 Sixth error information in past
#8664 to #8675 Fifth error information in past Motion error history
At error
#8676 to #8687 Fourth error information in past (8 errors) — —
occurrence
#8688 to #8699 Third error information in past (96 points)
#8700 to #8711 Second error information in past
#8712 to #8723 First error information in past
#8724 to #8735 Latest error information

Error information
Seventh Sixth Fifth Fourth Third Second First Signal name
Latest
in past in past in past in past in past in past in past
#8640 #8652 #8664 #8676 #8688 #8700 #8712 #8724 Error Motion SFC program No.
#8641 #8653 #8665 #8677 #8689 #8701 #8713 #8725 Error type
#8642 #8654 #8666 #8678 #8690 #8702 #8714 #8726 Error program No.

Error block No./Motion SFC list/

#8643 #8655 #8667 #8679 #8691 #8703 #8715 #8727
Line No./Axis No.
#8644 #8656 #8668 #8680 #8692 #8704 #8716 #8728 Error code
#8645 #8657 #8669 #8681 #8693 #8705 #8717 #8729 Error occurrence time (Year/month)
#8646 #8658 #8670 #8682 #8694 #8706 #8718 #8730 Error occurrence time (Day/hour)
#8647 #8659 #8671 #8683 #8695 #8707 #8719 #8731 Error occurrence time (Minute/second)
#8648 #8660 #8672 #8684 #8696 #8708 #8720 #8732 Error setting data information
#8649 #8661 #8673 #8685 #8697 #8709 #8721 #8733 Unusable
#8650 #8662 #8674 #8686 #8698 #8710 #8722 #8734
Error setting data
#8651 #8663 #8675 #8687 #8699 #8711 #8723 #8735

7 - 22
7 POSITIONING DEDICATED SIGNALS

7.4.4 Mark detection devices

(1) Mark detection monitor devices

Mark
detection Device No. Signal name
function No.

1 #8896 to #8975 Signal

Signal name Refresh cycle
direction
0
2 #8976 to #9055 Mark detection data current monitor Operation cycle
1
2 Number of marks detected At mark detection
3 #9056 to #9135
3 Mark detection settings verification flag Main cycle
4
4 #9136 to #9215
5
6
7
8
9 Not available
—
10
11
12
13 Status
14 signal
15
16
Latch data storage area 1
17
18
Latch data storage area 2
19
20
Latch data storage area 3
21
At mark detection
22
Latch data storage area 4
23

to to

78
Latch data storage area 32
79

7 - 23
7 POSITIONING DEDICATED SIGNALS

(2) Mark detection setting devices

Mark
detection Device No. Signal name
function No.

#7912 to #7919 Signal

Signal name Fetch cycle
direction
0
1
2
3 Command
Registration code Main cycle
4 signal
5
6
7

Mark
detection Device No. Signal name
function No.
1 #7920 to #7939 
2 #7940 to #7959 Signal
 Signal name Fetch cycle
3 #7960 to #7979 direction
4 #7980 to #7999 0 Marl detection signal allocation devices At Registration code setting
1 Mark detection signal compensation time Operation cycle Command
2 Latch data type signal
At Registration code setting
3 Mark detection axis number
4
Not available — —
5
6
Latch data upper limit
7
Command
8 Operation cycle
Latch data lower limit signal
9
10 Mark detection mode
11
12
13
14
15 Not available — —

16
17
18
19

7 - 24
7 POSITIONING DEDICATED SIGNALS

7.5 Special relays/Special registers

7.5.1 Special relays

Special relays are internal relays whose applications are fixed in the Motion controller.
For this reason, they cannot be used in the same way as the normal internal relays by
the Motion SFC programs.
However, they can be turned ON/OFF as needed in order to control the Motion
controller.

Explanation of headings used in the table on the next page.

Item Explanation
No. • Indicates the device No. of the special relay.
Name • Indicates the name of the special relay.
Meaning • Indicates the nature of the special relay.
Details • Indicates detailed information about the nature of the special relay.

• Indicates whether the relay is set by the system or user, and, if it is set by system, when
setting is performed.
<Set by>
S: Set by system (Motion controller)
U: Set by user (Motion SFC program or test operation using MT Developer2)
S/U: Set by both system (Motion controller) and user
Set by <When set> Indicated only if setting is done by system (Motion controller).
(When set) Main process: Set during each main processing (free time processing of the CPU)
Initial process: Set only during initial processing (when power supply is turned ON, or
when executed the reset)
Status change : Set only when there is a change in status
Error : Set when error is occurred.
Request : Set only when there is a user request (Special relay, etc.)
Operation cycle : Set during each operation cycle of the Motion controller.

7 - 25
7 POSITIONING DEDICATED SIGNALS

Special relay list

Set by
No. Name Meaning Details Remark
(When set)
• Turns ON if an error occurs as a result of diagnosis.
• Remains ON even if the condition is restored to normal
OFF : No error thereafter.
SM0 Diagnostic error
ON : Error • Turns ON when the Motion error detection flag (M2039) goes
from ON to OFF except in the case of a stop error after
confirming the error content.
• Turns ON if an error occurs as a result of self-diagnosis.
• Remains ON even if the condition is restored to normal
OFF : No self-diagnostic error thereafter.
SM1 Self-diagnostic error
ON : Self-diagnostic error • Turns ON when the Motion error detection flag (M2039) goes
from ON to OFF except when a stop error occurs after
confirming the error content.
• Turns ON if the voltage of external battery reduces to less
OFF : Normal than 2.5[V].
SM51 Battery low latch
ON : Battery low • Remains ON even if the condition is restored to normal
thereafter.
S (Occur an error)
• Turns on when the voltage of the external battery reduces to
OFF : Normal less than 2.5[V].
SM52 Battery low
ON : Battery low • Turns OFF when the voltage of external battery returns to
normal.
OFF : AC/DC DOWN
• Turns ON if an instantaneous power failure of 10[ms] or less
AC/DC DOWN not detected
SM53 occurs during use of the AC power supply module.
detection ON : AC/DC DOWN
Resets after the power supply is cycled.
detected
• Turns ON if the voltage of external battery reduces to less
Battery low warning OFF : Normal than 2.7[V].
SM58
latch ON : Battery low • Remains ON even if the condition is restored to normal
thereafter.
• Turns on when the voltage of the external battery reduces to
OFF : Normal less than 2.7[V].
SM59 Battery low warning
ON : Battery low • Turns OFF when the voltage of external battery returns to
normal.
OFF : No error • Turns ON if an error occurs in the clock data (SD210 to
SM211 Clock data error S (Request)
ON : Error SD213) value, and turns OFF if no error is detected.
ON
SM400 Always ON • Normally ON. signal
OFF
S (Main processing)
ON
SM401 Always OFF • Normally OFF signal.
OFF

7 - 26
7 POSITIONING DEDICATED SIGNALS

Special relay list (Continued)

Set by
No. Name Meaning Details Remark
(When set)
• When the PLC ready flag (M2000) turns from OFF to ON,
ON : PCPU READY
the fixed parameters, servo parameters and limit switch
PCPU READY completion
SM500 output data, etc., are checked, and if no error is detected,
complete OFF : PCPU READY
this flag turns ON.
incompletion
• Turns OFF with PLC ready flag (M2000) OFF.
S (Request)
• Judge whether TEST mode ON or not using
MT Developer2.
ON : TEST mode ON
SM501 Test mode ON • If the TEST mode is not established by TEST mode request
OFF : Except TEST mode
using MT Developer2, the TEST mode request error flag
(SM510) turns ON.
External forced stop ON : Forced stop OFF
SM502 • Confirms forced stop ON/OFF. S (Operation cycle)
input OFF : Forced stop ON
ON : Digital oscilloscope is
Digital oscilloscope stop • Confirms the execution of digital oscilloscope using
SM503 S (Change status)
executing OFF : Digital oscilloscope is MT Developer2.
executing
• Turns ON if the TEST mode is not established by TEST mode
TEST mode request ON : Abnormal request using MT Developer2.
SM510
error OFF : Normal • When this relay is ON, the error content is stored in the
TEST mode request error register (SD510, SD511).
• Turns ON when a "watchdog timer error" is detected by the
Motion controller self-diagnosis function.
Motion controller ON : Abnormal When the Motion CPU detects a WDT error, it executes an
SM512
WDT error OFF : Normal immediate stop without deceleration of the operating axes.
• The error cause is stored in the "Motion controller WDT error
cause (SD512)".
ON : At least one D714 to • Judges whether the register for the manual pulse generator
Manual pulse D715 setting is axis setting (D714 to D715) is normal/abnormal.
SM513 generator axis setting abnormal. • When this relay is ON, the error content is stored in the
error OFF : All D714 to D715 manual pulse generator axis setting error register (SD513 S (Occur an error)
settings are normal. to SD514).
• Judges whether the positioning data of servo program(K)
specified with the Motion SFC program is normal/abnormal,
Servo program ON : Abnormal
SM516 and if an error is detected turns ON.
setting error OFF : Normal
• The content of a servo program setting error is stored at
SD516, SD517.
• Turns ON when the temperature of Motion controller
Over heat warning OFF : Normal
SM526 becomes specified value 85[°C] (185[°F]) or more.
latch ON : Abnormal
Remains ON even if normal status is restored.
• Turn ON when the temperature of Motion controller becomes
OFF : Normal specified value 85[°C] (185[°F]) or more.
SM527 Over heat warning
ON : Abnormal Turn OFF when the temperature of Motion controller returns
to normal.
OFF : Ignored • When this relay turns ON, the clock data stored in SD210 –
SM800 Clock data set request U
ON : Set request SD213 is written to the clock element.
Clock data read OFF : Ignored • When this relay is ON, clock data is read to SD210 to
SM801 U
request ON : Read request SD213 as BCD values.

7 - 27
7 POSITIONING DEDICATED SIGNALS

7.5.2 Special registers

Special registers are internal registers whose applications are fixed in the
Motion controller. For this reason, it is not possible to use these registers in
Motion SFC programs in the same way that normal registers are used.
However, data can be written as needed in order to control the Motion
controller.
Data stored in the special registers are stored as BIN values if no special
designation has been made to the contrary.

Explanation of headings used in the table on the next page.

Item Explanation
Number • Indicates the No. of the special register.
Name • Indicates the name of the special register.
Meaning • Indicates the nature of the special register.
Details • Indicates detailed information about the nature of the special register.

• Indicates whether the register is set by the system or user, and, if set by system, when
setting is performed.
<Set by>
S: Set by system (Motion controller)
U: Set by user (Motion SFC program or test operation using MT Developer2)
S/U: Set by both system (Motion controller) and user
Set by <When set> Indicated only if setting is done by system (Motion controller).
(When set) Main process: Set during each main processing (free time processing of the CPU)
Initial process: Set only during initial processing (when power supply is turned ON, or
when executed the reset)
Status change : Set only when there is a change in status
Error : Set when error is occurred.
Request : Set only when there is a user request (Special relay, etc.)
Operation cycle : Set during each operation cycle of the Motion controller.

7 - 28
7 POSITIONING DEDICATED SIGNALS

Special register list

Set by
No. Name Meaning Details Remark
(When set)
• Error codes for any errors discovered during diagnosis are stored as BIN
data.
• Refer to "APPENDIX 3" for details of the error code.
Diagnostic error • After confirming the error content (except a stop error) it is possible to clear
SD0 Diagnostic errors
code turning the Motion error detection flag (M2039) from ON to OFF.
• Clear SD0 to SD26 by switching the Motion error detection flag (M2039) from
ON to OFF, except in the case of a stop error after confirming the error
content.
• The year (last two digits) and month that SD0 data was updated is stored as
BCD 2-digit code.
SD1 Example : January 2006
B15 to B8 B7 to B0
H0601
Year(0 to 99) Month(1 to 12)

• The day and hour that SD0 data was updated is stored as BCD 2-digit code.
Clock time for Clock time for
SD2 diagnostic error diagnostic error B15 to B8 B7 to B0 Example : 25st, 10 a.m
H2510
occurrence occurrence Day(1 to 31) Hour(0 to 23)

• The minute and second that SD0 data was updated is stored as BCD 2-digit
code.
SD3 Example : 35min., 48 sec.
B15 to B8 B7 to B0
H3548
Minute(0 to 59) Second(0 to 59)

• Category codes which help indicate what type of information is being stored in
the error common information areas (SD5 to SD15) and error individual
information areas (SD16 to SD26) are stored. The category code for judging
the error information type is stored.
B15 to B8 B7 to B0
S (Occur an error)
Individual information Common information
Error information Error information category codes category codes
SD4
categories category code • The common information category codes store the following codes.
0: No error
1: Module No./CPU No./Base No.
• The individual information category codes store the following codes.
0: No error
5: Parameter No.
13:Parameter No./CPU No.
SD5
SD6 • Common information corresponding to the diagnostic error (SD0) is stored.
• The error common information type can be judged by SD4 (common
SD7
information category code).
SD8
1: Module No./CPU No./Base No.
SD9
• For the Multiple CPU system, Module No. or CPU No. is stored
SD10
depending on the error that occurred.
SD11 (Refer to corresponding error code for which No. has been stored.)
SD12 Error common Error common CPU No.1: 1, CPU No.2: 2, CPU No.3: 3, CPU No.4: 4
SD13 information information
SD14 No. Meaning
SD5 Module No./CPU No./Base No.
SD6 I/O No.
SD7
SD15
to Empty
SD15

7 - 29
7 POSITIONING DEDICATED SIGNALS

Special register list (Continued)

Set by
No. Name Meaning Details Remark
(When set)
SD16
SD17
SD18
SD19
SD20
Error individual Error individual —
SD21
information information
SD22
SD23 S (Occur an error)
SD24
SD25
SD26
• Every time the input voltage falls to or below 85[%] of the rating (DC power)
AC/DC DOWN Number of times
SD53 while the Motion controller is performing calculations, the value is
counter No. for AC/DC DOWN
incremented by 1 and stored in BIN code.
Module No. with
SD60 Fuse blown No. • The lowest station I/O No. of the module with the blown fuse is stored.
blown fuse
• The CPU switch status is stored in the following format.
B15 B12 B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 B0

Status of CPU Not used 2) 1)

SD200 Status of switch
switch
1) CPU switch status 0: RUN
1: STOP
2) Memory card switch Always OFF

• The CPU operating status is stored as indicated in the following figure. S (Main processing)
B15 B12 B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 B0

2) 1)
Operating status Operating status
SD203
of CPU of CPU 1) Operating status of CPU 0: RUN
2: STOP
2) STOP cause 0: RUN/STOP switch
(Note) Priority is earliest first 4: Error

7 - 30
7 POSITIONING DEDICATED SIGNALS

Special register list (Continued)

Set by
No. Name Meaning Details Remark
(When set)
• The year (last two digits) and month are stored as BCD code.
B15 to B12 B11 to B8 B7 to B4 B3 to B0 Example : July, 2006
Clock data H0607
SD210
(Year, Month)

Year Month

• The day and hour are stored as BCD code.

B15 to B12 B11 to B8 B7 to B4 B3 to B0 Example : 31st, 10 a.m.
Clock data H3110
SD211
(Day, Hour)

Day Hour

• The minutes and seconds are stored as BCD code.

B15 to B12 B11 to B8 B7 to B4 B3 to B0 Example : 35 min., 48 sec.
Clock data H3548
SD212 Clock data S/U (Request)
(Minute, Second)

Minute Second

• The day of week is stored as BCD code.

B15 to B12 B11 to B8 B7 to B4 B3 to B0 Example : Friday
H0005

Day of week
Clock data
SD213 0 Sunday
(Day of week) Always set to "0". 1 Monday
2 Tuesday
3 Wednesday
4 Thursday
5 Friday
6 Saturday

Number of points
SD290 • Stores the number of points currently set for X devices.
assigned for X
Number of points
SD291 • Stores the number of points currently set for Y devices.
assigned for Y
Number of points
SD292 • Stores the number of points currently set for M devices.
assigned for M
Number of points
SD293 • Stores the number of points currently set for L devices.
assigned for L
Number of points
SD294 • Stores the number of points currently set for B devices.
assigned for B
Number of points
SD295 • Stores the number of points currently set for F devices.
assigned for F
Number of points
SD296 • Stores the number of points currently set for SB devices.
assigned for SB
Device Number of points
SD297 • Stores the number of points currently set for V devices. S (Initial processing)
assignment assigned for V
Number of points
SD298 • Stores the number of points currently set for S devices.
assigned for S
Number of points
SD299 • Stores the number of points currently set for T devices.
assigned for T
Number of points
SD300 • Stores the number of points currently set for ST devices.
assigned for ST
Number of points
SD301 • Stores the number of points currently set for C devices.
assigned for C
Number of points
SD302 • Stores the number of points currently set for D devices.
assigned for D
Number of points
SD303 • Stores the number of points currently set for W devices.
assigned for W
Number of points
SD304 • Stores the number of points currently set for SW devices.
assigned for SW

7 - 31
7 POSITIONING DEDICATED SIGNALS

Special register list (Continued)

Set by
No. Name Meaning Details Remark
(When set)
• The loading status (loading: 1/non-loading: 0) of the servo amplifier checked
in initial process, and stored as the bit data.
Servo amplifier SD502 : b0 (Axis 1)
SD502 Servo amplifier
loading S (Initial processing)
SD503 loading information
information • The axis which turned from non-loading to loading status after power-on is
handled as loaded. (However, the axis which turned from loading to non-
loading status remains as loaded.)
SD504 Real mode/virtual Real mode /virtual • When a mode switching error occurs in real-to-virtual or virtual-to-real
SD505 mode switching mode switching mode switching, or a mode continuation error occurs in the virtual mode, its S (Occur an error)
SD506 error information error code error information is stored.
It is operating in
requirement error • Each axis is stopping: 0/Operating: 1, information is stored as a bit data.
SD510 Test mode
occurrence of the SD510 : b0 (Axis 1)
SD511 request error
test mode, axis
information
• The following error codes are stored in SD512.
1: S/W fault 1
2: Operation cycle over
3: —
4: WDT error
Motion CPU Error meaning of
SD512 201 to 215: —
WDT error cause WDT error occurs
250 to 253: Servo amplifier interface H/W fault
300: S/W fault 3
301: 15 CPSTART instructions of 8 or more points were started
simultaneously.
303: S/W fault 4
S (Occur an error)
• Contents of the manual pulse generator axis setting error is stored when the
manual pulse generator axis setting error flag (SM513) turns on.
Manual pulse
SD513 Manual pulse (Normal: 0/Setting error: 1)
generator axis
SD514 generator axis SD513 : The manual pulse generator axis setting error is stored in b0 (P1).
setting error
SD515 setting error The smoothing magnification setting is stored in b3 (P1 ).
information
SD514 : One pulse input magnification setting error is stored in b0 (axis 1 ).

Error program Error program No. • When the servo program setting error flag (SM516) turns on, the erroneous
SD516
No. of servo program servo program No. will be stored.
Error item Error code of servo • When the servo program setting error flag (SM516) turns on, the error code
SD517
information program corresponding to the erroneous setting item will be stored.
Scan time • Main cycle is stored in the 1ms units.
SD520 Scan time
(1ms units) Setting range (0 to 65535[ms])
S (Main processing)
Maximum scan Maximum scan • The maximum value of the main cycle is stored in the 1ms units.
SD521
time time (1ms units) Setting range (0 to 65535[ms])
Motion operation Motion operation
SD522 • The time required for motion operation cycle is stored in the [μs] unit. S (Operation cycle)
cycle cycle
Operation cycle Operation cycle
SD523 of the Motion of the Motion CPU • The setting operation cycle is stored in the [μs] unit. S (Initial processing)
CPU setting setting
SD700 allocated devices allocated number • The number of # devices that are set is stored. S (Initial processing)
SD720 444μs Coasting 444μs Coasting • It is counting up "1" each 444us. (No latch device. When power is on, it will be
S (by 1 per 444μs)
SD721 Timer Timer "0" and then it starts counting up.

7 - 32
8 PARAMETERS FOR POSITIONING CONTROL

8. PARAMETERS FOR POSITIONING CONTROL

8.1 Fixed Parameters

(1) The user sets the fixed parameters for each axis based on the mechanical system
requirements, etc.
(2) Fixed parameters are set using MT Developer2.
(3) Refer to "Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller (SV13/SV22) Programming
Manual (REAL MODE)" for details.

Table 8.1 Fixed parameter list

Setting range
No. Item mm inch degree PLS Initial value Units Remarks
Setting range Units Setting range Units Setting range Units Setting range Units
• Set the command value for
1 Unit setting 0 1 2 3 3 each axis at the positioning
control.
• Set the number of feedback
Travel value per pulse (A)

Number of
pulses per pulses per motor rotation
2 1 to 2147483647[PLS] 20000 based on the mechanical
rotation
system.
(AP)
Travel • Set the travel value per motor
value per 0.1 to 0.00001 to 0.00001 to 1 to based on the mechanical
3 20000 system.
rotation 214748364.7 21474.83647 21474.83647 2147483647
(AL)
• Set the backlash amount of
the machine.
• Every time the direction
changes during positioning,
Backlash
backlash compensation is
4 compensation 0 to 6553.5 0 to 0.65535 0 to 0.65535 0 to 65535 0
excuted with the set value.
amount (Note) The expression below shows
the setting range.
0 (backlash compensation
PLS
amount) × AP/AL 65535
• Set the upper limit for the
-214748364.8 μm -21474.83648 inch degree -2147483648 PLS
Upper stroke 0 to machine travel range. The
5 to to to 2147483647
limit (Note) 359.99999 expression below shows the
214748364.7 21474.83647 2147483647 setting range.
• Set the lower limit for the
-214748364.8 -21474.83648 -2147483648
Lower stroke 0 to machine travel range. The
6 to to to 0
limit (Note) 359.99999 expression below shows the
214748364.7 21474.83647 2147483647 setting range. 8
• Set the position at which the
command in-position signal
(M2403+20n) turns on
Command in- [(positioning address) -
0.1 to 0.00001 to 0.00001 to 1 to
7 position range 100 (current value)].
214748364.7 21474.83647 359.99999 2147483647
(Note) The expression below shows
the setting range.
1 (command in-position
range) × AP/AL 32767
• When the control unit is set to
Speed control
degrees, set whether the
10 multiplier
8 Invalid/Valid Invalid positioning control is executed
setting for
based on a 10 multiplier of
degree axis the command speed setting.

(Note): The display of the possible setting range changes according to the electronic gear value.

8-1
8 PARAMETERS FOR POSITIONING CONTROL

8.2 Parameter Block

(1) Parameter blocks allow for easy setting changes by allowing data such as
acceleration/deceleration control to be set once and then reused for multiple
positioning processes.
(2) A maximum of 64 parameter blocks can be created.
(3) Parameter blocks can be set using MT Developer2.
(4) Parameter block parameters available are shown in Table 8.2.
(5) Refer to "Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller (SV13/SV22) Programming
Manual (REAL MODE)" for details.

Table 8.2 Parameter Block Setting List

Setting range
Initial
No. Item mm inch degree PLS Units Remarks
value
Setting range Units Setting range Units Setting range Units Setting range Units
• Set the units for compensation control.
Interpolation • It can be also used as the units for the
1 control unit 0 1 2 3 3 command speed and allowable error
(Note-2) range for circular interpolation set in the
servo program.
• Set the maximum speed for
positioning/home position return.
0.001 to
0.01 to mm/ 0.001 to inch/ degree/ 1 to PLS/ PLS/ • If the positioning speed or home position
2 Speed limit value 2147483.647 200000
6000000.00 min 600000.000 min min 2147483647 s s return speed setting exceeds the speed
(Note-1)
limit value, control is executed at the
speed limit value.
• Set the time taken to reach the speed
3 Acceleration time 1 to 65535[ms] 1000 ms limit value from the start of motion.

• Set the time taken to stop from the

4 Deceleration time 1 to 65535[ms] 1000 ms
speed limit value.
• Set the time taken to stop from the
Rapid stop
5 1 to 65535[ms] 1000 ms speed limit value when a rapid stop is
deceleration time
executed.
• Set the S-curve ratio for S-pattern
processing.
6 S-curve ratio 0 to 100[%] 0 % • When the S-curve ratio is 0[%],
trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration
processing is executed.
• Set the torque limit value in the servo
7 Torque limit value 1 to 1000[%] 300 %
program.
Deceleration • Set the deceleration processing when
0 : Deceleration stop is executed based on the deceleration time.
8 processing on 0 external signals (STOP, FLS, RLS) are
1 : Deceleration stop is executed based on the rapid stop deceleration time.
STOP input input.
Allowable error • Set the permissible range for the locus of
range for circular PL the arc and the set end point
9 0 to 10000.0 μm 0 to 1.00000 inch 0 to 1.00000 degree 0 to 100000 100 PLS
interpolation S coordinates.
(Note-2)
(Note-1): When the "speed control 10 multiplier setting for degree axis" is set to "valid", the setting range is 0.01 to 21474836.47[degree/min].
However, setting range of 0.001 to 2147483.647[degree/min] is displayed in the parameter block setting screen of programming software.
(Note-2): The setting value is invalid in Real mode.

POINT
(1) Parameter blocks are specified in the home position return data, JOG operation
data or servo program.
(2) The various parameter block data can be changed using the servo program.

8-2
8 PARAMETERS FOR POSITIONING CONTROL

POINT
The data set in the parameter block is used in positioning control, home position return and
JOG operation.
(1) The parameter block No. used in the positioning control is set using MT Developer2
during creation of the servo program. If it is not set, control is executed with the
contents of parameter block No.1.
Also, it is possible to set parameter block data individually in the servo program.
[Servo program creation screen]
Parameter block No.
setting

Setting items of the

parameter block

Individual parameter
block data setting

UNIT : Interpolation control unit S.R. : Speed limit value

: Acceleration time : Deceleration time
E : Rapid stop deceleration time, P.TORQ : Torque limit value
STOP : Deceleration processing on STOP input : Allowable error range for circular
S RATIO : S-curve ratio when S-pattern processing interpolation
is executed

(2) The parameter block No. used in the home position return or JOG operation is set in
the "home position return data" or "JOG operation data" setting areas of
MT Developer2.
[Home position return data setting screen]

Parameter block No. setting

in the home position return

Parameter block No. setting

in the JOG operation

8-3
8 PARAMETERS FOR POSITIONING CONTROL

8.3 JOG Operation Data

(1) The settings for JOG operation is executed.

(2) Individual start or simultaneous start can be used in JOG operation.
(3) JOG operation can be executed using the Motion SFC program or test mode of
MT Developer2.
(Refer to the help of MT Developer2 for JOG operation method in the test mode of
MT Developer2.)
(4) Refer to "Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller (SV13/SV22) Programming
Manual (REAL MODE)" for details.

Table 8.3 JOG operation data list

Setting range
mm inch degree PLS Initial
No. Item Units Remarks
Setting Setting Setting value
Units Units Units Setting range Units
range range range
• Sets the maximum speed at the JOG
JOG 0.001 to operation.
0.01 to mm 0.001 to inch degree/ 1 to PLS
1 speed limit 2147483.647 20000 PLS/s • If JOG speed setting exceeds the JOG
6000000.00 /min 600000.000 /min min 2147483647 /s
value (Note-1) speed limit value, it is controlled with JOG
speed limit value.
Parameter • Sets the parameter block No. to be used at
2 block 1 to 64 1 the JOG operation.
setting
(Note-1): When the "speed control 10 multiplier speed setting for degree axis" is set to "valid", the setting range is 0.01 to 21474836.47[degree/min].

8-4
8 PARAMETERS FOR POSITIONING CONTROL

8.4 Home Position Return

(1) Use home position return immediately after power supply ON or at other times
when confirmation of axis location is required.

(2) Six methods for home position return are as follows.

• Proximity dog type
• Count type
• Data set type
• Dog cradle type
• Stopper type
• Limit switch combined type

(3) Select the optimal home position return method based on the system
configuration and application with reference to the following.

(4) Refer to "Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller (SV13/SV22) Programming

Manual (REAL MODE)" for details.

Home position return methods Contents Applications

• Home position is zero point of servomotor. • It is used in the system which can surely pass a
Proximity dog type 1 • When the proximity dog is ON, it cannot be zero point from the home position return start to
started. proximity dog ON OFF.
Proximity dog type
• Home position is zero point of servomotor. • This method is valid when the stroke range is
Proximity dog type 2 • When the proximity dog is ON, it can be short and "proximity dog type 1" cannot be used.
started.
• Home position is zero point of servomotor. • It is used in systems which will always pass a
zero point while traveling the set distance from
Count type 1
the home position return start point based on the
"travel value after proximity dog ON" setting.
Count type • Zero point is not used in the home position • This method is used when the proximity dog is
Count type 2 return. near the stroke end and the stroke range is
narrow.
• Home position is zero point of servomotor. • This method is valid when the stroke range is
Count type 3
short and "count type 1" cannot be used.
• Home position is the commanded position • External input signals such as dog signal are not
of Motion controller. used in an absolute position system.
Data set type 1
• This method is valid for the data set independent
Data set type
of a deviation counter value.
• Home position is real position of • External input signals such as dog signal are not
Data set type 2
servomotor. used in an absolute position system.
• Home position is zero point of servomotor • It is easy to set the position of the proximity dog,
Dog cradle type immediately after the proximity dog signal because it is near the same position used for
ON. homing.
• Home position is set at the point where • This method is useful for improving accuracy of
further motion is prevented by a physical home position return when the physical stopper
Stopper type 1
stopper. of a machine is used as the home position.
• Proximity dog is used.
Stopper type
• Home position is set at the point where
further motion is prevented by a physical
Stopper type 2
stopper.
• Proximity dog is not used.
• Home position is zero point of servomotor. • It is used in the system that the proximity dog
Limit switch combined type • Proximity dog is not used. signal cannot be used and only external limit
• External limit switch is used. switch can be used.

8-5
8 PARAMETERS FOR POSITIONING CONTROL

Table 8.4 Home position return data list

Setting range
Indirect setting
mm inch degree PLS Initial
No. Item Units
value Valid/ Number
Setting range Units Setting range Units Setting range Units Setting range Units
invalid of words
Home position 0: Reverse direction (Address decrease direction)
1 0
return direction 1: Forward direction (Address increase direction)
0: Proximity dog type 1 7: Dog cradle type
4: Proximity dog type 2 8: Stopper type 1
1: Count type 1 9: Stopper type 2
Home position
2 5: Count type 2 10: Limit switch combined type 0
return method
6: Count type 3
2: Data set type 1
3: Data set type 2
-214748364.8 -21474.83648 -2147483648
Home position 0 to
3 to μm to inch degree to PLS 0 PLS 2
address 359.99999
214748364.7 21474.83647 2147483647
0.001 to
Home position 0.01 to 0.001 to 1 to
4 mm/min inch/min 2147483.647 degree/min PLS/s 1 PLS/s 2
return speed 6000000.00 600000.000 10000000
(Note-1)
0.001 to
0.01 to 0.001 to 1 to
5 Creep speed mm/min inch/min 2147483.647 degree/min PLS/s 1 PLS/s 2
6000000.00 600000.000 10000000
(Note-1)
Travel value 0.00000
0.0 to 0.00000 to 0 to
6 after proximity μm to inch degree PLS 0 PLS 2
214748364.7 21474.83647 2147483647
dog ON 21474.83647
Parameter
7 1 to 64 1
Block setting
Home position
0: Invalid (Do not execute the home position return retry by limit switch.)
8 return retry 0
1: Valid (Execute the home position return retry by limit switch.)
function
Dwell time at
the home
9 0 to 5000 [ms] 0 ms 1
position return
retry
-214748364.8 -21474.83648 -21474.83648 -2147483648
Home position
10 to μm to inch to degree to PLS 0 PLS 2
shift amount
214748364.7 21474.83647 21474.83647 2147483647
Speed set at
0: Home position return speed
11 the home 0
1: Creep speed
position shift
Torque limit
12 value at the 1 to 1000 [%] 300 % 1
creep speed
Operation
setting for
0: Execute a servo program
13 incompletion 1
1: Not execute a servo program
of home
position return

8-6
8 PARAMETERS FOR POSITIONING CONTROL

No. Item Remarks

Home position • The home position return direction is set.

1
return direction
• The home position return method is set.
• The proximity dog type or count type are recommended for servo amplifier’s/systems which do not support absolute value.
Home position
2
return method

• The current value of home position after the home position return is set.
Home position
3
address

• The home position return speed is set.

Home position
4
return speed

• The creep speed (low speed immediately before stopping after deceleration from home position return speed)
5 Creep speed after the proximity dog ON is set.

Travel value after • The travel value after the proximity dog ON for the count type is set.
6 proximity • More than the deceleration distance at the home position return speed is set.
dog ON
Parameter • The parameter block (Refer to Section 4.3) No. to use for home position return is set.
7
Block setting
Home position • Valid/invalid of home position return retry is set.
8 return retry
function
Dwell time at the • The stop time at the deceleration stop during the home position return retry is set.
home position
9
return
retry
• The shift amount at the home position shift is set.
Home position
10
shift amount

• The operation speed which set the home position shift amount except "0" is set.
Speed set at the
11
home position shift

• The torque limit value with creep speed at the stopper type home position return is set.
Torque limit value
12
at the creep speed

• When the home position return request signal is ON, it set whether a servo program can be executed or not.
Operation setting
for incompletion
13
of home position
return

8-7
8 PARAMETERS FOR POSITIONING CONTROL

MEMO

8-8
9 SERVO PROGRAMS FOR POSITIONING CONTROL

9. SERVO PROGRAMS FOR POSITIONING CONTROL

Servo programs specify the type of the positioning data required to execute positioning
control in the Motion controller.
This chapter describes the configuration and setting method of the servo programs.

9.1 Servo Program Composition Area

This section describes the composition of servo programs and the area in which they
are stored.

9.1.1 Servo Program Composition

A servo program is composed of a program number, servo instructions and positioning

data.
When a program number and the required servo instructions are specified using
MT Developer2, the positioning data required to execute the specified servo
instructions can be set.

[Explanation of the program]

Program No. K11 . . . . . . . Program No.11
Control units ABS-1 . . . . . 1 axis linear interpolation control as absolute
<K 11> data method.
Servo instruction ABS-1
Axis 1, 3000000.0 [mm] Axis1, 3000000.0 Axis used and positioning address
Speed 40000.00 [mm/min]
Dwell 2500 [ms]
Positioning M-code 12
data P.B. 3 Used axes Positioning address
1 3000000.0[μm]

• Speed …………. Command speed 40000.00 [mm/min]

• Dwell ……………………. Dwell time 2500 [ms]
Number of program steps 7 • M-code …………………. M-code 12
Number of used programs 7/16384
• P.B. ……………………... Parameter block No. 3

Fig. 9.1 Composition example of servo program

(1) Program No. ........... This number is specified using the Motion SFC program.
Any number in the range of 0 to 4095 can be set.

(2) Servo instruction .… Type of positioning control is indicated. 9

9-1
9 SERVO PROGRAMS FOR POSITIONING CONTROL

(3) Positioning data ...... This is the required data for executing servo instructions.
The data required is fixed for each servo instruction.
The following applies for the servo program shown in Figure
9.1:
• Axis used and
Data which must be set in order to
positioning address
execute the servo instruction.
• Command speed
• Dwell time Data which will be set to default
• M-code values for control if not set.
• P.B. Control is executed using the data
(parameter block) of parameter block 3 (P.B.3).

9.1.2 Servo program area

(1) Servo program area

Internal RAM memory of the Motion controller which stores the servo program
created using MT Developer2.

(2) Servo program capacity

The servo program area has a capacity of 16384 steps.

0
Program No.10
Program No.1 Servo programs are stored in the order
in which their program No. were created.
Program No. 2

Servo program area

(16k steps)

16384

Step

Fig. 9.2 Servo program area

POINT
If the servo program area has insufficient capacity, execute multiple positioning
control operations with one program using indirect setting of the servo program’s
positioning data.

9-2
9 SERVO PROGRAMS FOR POSITIONING CONTROL

9.2 Servo Instructions

The servo instructions used in the servo programs are shown below.
Refer to the "Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion Controller (SV13/SV22) Programming
Manual (Motion SFC)" for details of the current value change control (CHGA, CHGA-E,
CHGA-C).

(1) Guide to servo instruction list

Table 9.1 Guide to Servo Instruction List
3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8)

Positioning data
Common Arc/Helical OSC Parameter block Other

Reference axis No.

WAIT-ON/OFF
FIN acceleration/deceleration
interpolation

Program No.
M-code

Fixed position stop acceleration

/deceleration time
Frequency

Fixed position stop

Amplitude

Acceleration time
Command speed

Torque limit value

Torque limit value

Parameter block No.

Central point
Dwell time

Auxiliary point

Pitch
Starting angle

Control unit
Speed limit value

Deceleration time

Repeat condition

Skip
Cancel
Radius

S-curve ratio

Command speed (constant speed)

Rapid stop deceleration time
Address/travel
Axis

Allowable error range for circular

Positioning control

Number of steps
at stop input
Deceleration processing
Instruction Processing
symbol

Virtual enable

Number of step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 1
Number of indirect words 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1/ 2 1(B) 1(B) 1 1(B) 1 1(B)
1(B)

ABS-1 Absolute 1-axis positioning

1 axis

4 to 17
INC-1 Incremental 1-axis positioning

Absolute 2-axes linear

axes

ABS-2

1) 2)

Number Description
Instruction symbol Lists the servo instructions usable in servo programs.
1)
Processing Lists the processing outlines of the servo instructions.
(a) Indicates positioning data which can be set in servo instructions.
1) : Item which must be set by the user (The servo instruction can not execute unless this data is set by the user.)
2) : Item which is set when required by user (Data is set to the default value unless otherwise set by user.)
(b) Allows direct or indirect designation (except axis No.)
1) Direct designation : Set with numerical value.
2) Indirect designation : Set with word device.
2) • Servo program execution is controlled using the preset word device contents.
• Each setting item may either be 1 or 2 word data.
• For 2 word data, set the start device No..
(c) Number of steps
The more set items there are, the more the number of instruction steps. (The number of steps is displayed when the
servo program is created.)
(The instruction + item comprise the minimum steps, and one item increases the number of steps by 1.)
3) Items common to the servo instructions
4) Items set in circular interpolation servo programs
5) Items set for high-speed oscillation
Set when wishing to deviate from data set in the parameter block used in the servo program (left at default parameter block
6) value when not set)
(The parameter block data remains unchanged in other servo programs.)
7) Setting items other than the common, circular and parameter block items (Items to be set vary with the servo instruction.)
8) Indicates the number of steps of each servo instruction.

9-3
9 SERVO PROGRAMS FOR POSITIONING CONTROL

(2) Servo instruction list

The servo program servo instructions and available positioning data used are
shown in Table 9.2. Refer to Section 9.3 for details of the servo instruction
positioning data.

Table 9.2 Servo instruction list

Positioning data
Common Arc/Helical

Torque limit value

Parameter block No.

Auxiliary point
Axis

Address/travel value

Command speed

Dwell time

M -code

Radius

Central point

Pitch
Positioning control

Instruction
Processing
symbol

Virtual enable —

Number of steps 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Number of indirect words 1 — 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 1

ABS-1 Absolute 1-axis positioning

1 axis

INC-1 Incremental 1-axis positioning

Linear interpolation control

ABS-2 Absolute 2-axes linear interpolation

2 axes

INC-2 Incremental 2-sxes linear interpolation

ABS-3 Absolute 3-axes linear interpolation

3 axes

INC-3 Incremental 3-axes linear interpolation

ABS-4 Absolute 4-axes linear interpolation

4 axes

INC-4 Incremental 4-axes linear interpolation

Absolute auxiliary point-specified circular

ABS
specified
Auxiliary

interpolation
point-

Incremental auxiliary point-specified circular

INC
interpolation
Absolute radius-specified circular
ABS
interpolation less than CW 180°
Circular interpolation control

Absolute radius-specified circular

ABS
interpolation CW 180° or more
Absolute radius-specified circular
ABS
interpolation less than CCW 180°
Radius-specified

Absolute radius-specified circular

ABS
interpolation CCW 180° or more
Incremental radius-specified circular
INC
interpolation less than CW 180°
Incremental radius-specified circular
INC
interpolation CW 180° or more
Incremental radius-specified circular
INC
interpolation less than CCW 180°
Incremental radius-specified circular
INC
interpolation CCW 180° or more

9-4
 9 SERVO PROGRAMS FOR POSITIONING CONTROL

Refer to "Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller (SV13/SV22) Programming

Manual (REAL MODE)" for details.
Servo instructions which need multiple axes like "Linear Interpolation control" and
"Circular Interpolation control" are set in Virtual mode.

Positioning data
OSC Parameter block Others (Note-2)

WAIT-ON/OFF
Program No.

(constant speed)
Command speed

Cancel

Skip

FIN acceleration/deceleration
Allowable error range for circular
Deceleration time
Frequency

Torque limit value

/deceleration time

Fixed position stop

Deceleration processing
Starting angle

Amplitude

Reference axis No.(Note-1)

Control unit

Acceleration time

at stop input

S-curve ratio
Rapid stop deceleration time
Speed limit value

interpolation

Repeat condition

Fixed position stop acceleration

Number of steps

— — — — — — — —
1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 1
Note-2
Note-2 Note-2 Note-2 Note-2
2 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1/ — 2 1 1
1(B) 1(B) 1(B) 1(B)
1(B)

4 to 17

5 to 20

7 to 21

8 to 22

7 to 22

6 to 21

: Must be set. : Set if required.

(Note-1) : Only reference axis speed specification.
(Note-2) : (B) indicates a bit device.

9-5
9 SERVO PROGRAMS FOR POSITIONING CONTROL

Table 9.2 Servo Instruction List (continued)

Positioning data
Common Arc/Helical

Parameter block No.

Torque limit value

M-code

Auxiliary point
Axis

Address/travel value

Command speed

Radius
Dwell time

Central point

Pitch
Instruction
Processing
Positioning control

symbol

Virtual enable —

Number of steps 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Number of indirect words 1 — 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 1

Absolute central point-specified circular

Central point-specified

ABS
Circular interpolation

interpolation CW
Absolute central point-specified circular
ABS
control

interpolation CCW
Incremental central point-specified circular
INC
interpolation CW
Incremental central point-specified circular
INC
interpolation CCW
Absolute auxiliary point- specified helical
specified
Auxiliary

ABH
point-

interpolation
Incremental auxiliary point- specified helical
INH
interpolation
Absolute radius-specified helical
ABH
interpolation less than CW 180°
Absolute radius-specified helical
ABH
interpolation CW 180° or more
Absolute radius-specified helical
ABH
interpolation less than CCW 180°
Radius-specified
Helical interpolation control

Absolute radius-specified helical

ABH
interpolation CCW 180° or more
Incremental radius-specified helical
INH
interpolation less than CW 180°
Incremental radius-specified helical
INH
interpolation CW 180° or more
Incremental radius-specified helical
INH
interpolation less than CCW 180°
Incremental radius-specified helical
INH
interpolation CCW 180° or more
Absolute central point-specified helical
Central point-specified

ABH
interpolation CW
Absolute central point-specified helical
ABH
interpolation CCW
Incremental central point-specified helical
INH
interpolation CW
Incremental central point-specified helical
INH
interpolation CCW

9-6
 2
1
—
Starting angle

2
1
—
Amplitude

OSC

2
1
—
Frequency

1
1
Reference axis No. (Note-1)

1
1
—
Control unit

2
2
Speed limit value

1
1
Acceleration time

1
1
Deceleration time

1
1
Rapid stop deceleration time

1
1
—
Torque limit value
Parameter block

Deceleration processing

1
1
—
at stop input
Allowable error range for circular

2
1 interpolation
Positioning data

1
1

S-curve ratio

9-7
1

1/

Repeat condition
1(B)
Note-2
1

Program No.

Command speed
9 SERVO PROGRAMS FOR POSITIONING CONTROL

2
2

(constant speed)
2

Cancel
1(B)
Note-2
2

: Must be set.
Skip
1(B)
Note-2
1
1

FIN acceleration/deceleration
Others (Note-2)

WAIT-ON/OFF
1(B)
Note-2

(Note-2) : (B) indicates a bit device.

Fixed position stop acceleration
1
1
—

: Set if required.
/deceleration time
1
—

Fixed position stop

1(B)
Note-2

(Note-1) : Only reference axis speed specification.

9 to 26
7 to 22

10 to 27
10 to 27
Number of steps
9 SERVO PROGRAMS FOR POSITIONING CONTROL

Table 9.2 Servo Instruction List (continued)

Positioning data
Common Arc/Helical

Parameter block No.

Torque limit value

Address/travel value

M-code

Auxiliary point
Axis

Command speed

Radius
Dwell time

Central point

Pitch
Instruction
Processing
Positioning control

symbol

Virtual enable —

Number of steps 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Number of indirect words 1 — 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 1

axes 2 axes 1 axis

FEED-1 1-axis fixed-pitch feed start

Fixed-pitch feed

2-axes linear interpolation

FEED-2 fixed-pitch feed start

3-axes linear interpolation

FEED-3 fixed-pitch feed start
3
Reverse Forward Reverse Forward Reverse Forward
rotation rotation rotation rotation rotation rotation

Speed control ( ) forward

VF
control ( )

rotation start
Speed

Speed control ( ) reverse

VR rotation start
Speed control ( ) forward
control ( )

VVF
Speed

rotation start
Speed control ( ) reverse
VVR rotation start
Speed-position control
VPF
control (Note-3)
Speed-position

forward rotation start

Speed-position control
VPR reverse rotation start
Restart

VPSTART Speed-position control restart

VSTART Speed-switching control start

VEND Speed-switching control end

ABS-1
Speed-switching control end
Speed-switching control

ABS-2 point address

ABS-3

INC-1
Travel value up to speed-switching
INC-2 control end point

INC-3
Speed-switching point
VABS absolute specification
Speed-switching point
VINC incremental specification

9-8
 9 SERVO PROGRAMS FOR POSITIONING CONTROL

Positioning data
OSC Parameter block Others (Note-2)

WAIT-ON/OFF
Program No.

Command speed
(constant speed)

Cancel

Skip

FIN acceleration/deceleration
Deceleration time

Allowable error range for circular

Torque limit value

/deceleration time
Frequency

Rapid stop deceleration time

Deceleration processing
at stop input

Fixed position stop

Starting angle

S-curve ratio
Amplitude

Control unit

Acceleration time
Speed limit value

interpolation

Repeat condition
Reference axis No. (Note-1)

Fixed position stop acceleration

Number of steps

— — — — — — — —
1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 1
Note-2
Note-2 Note-2 Note-2 Note-2
2 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1/ — 2 1 1
1(B) 1(B) 1(B) 1(B)
1(B)

4 to 17

5 to 19

7 to 21

3 to 15

3 to 16

4 to 18

2 to 4

1 to 13

4 to 9

5 to 10

7 to 12

4 to 9

5 to 10

7 to 12

4 to 6

: Must be set. : Set if required.

(Note-1) : Only reference axis speed specification.
(Note-2) : (B) indicates a bit device.
(Note-3) : The DOG signal of a servo amplifier is used for CHANGE (Speed/position switching) signal of “Speed/position switching control).

9-9
9 SERVO PROGRAMS FOR POSITIONING CONTROL

Table 9.2 Servo Instruction List (continued)

Positioning data
Common Arc/Helical

Address/travel value

Command speed

M-code
Dwell time

Torque limit value

Parameter block No.

Auxiliary point

Radius

Pitch
Axis

Central point
Positioning control

Instruction
Processing
symbol

Virtual enable —

Number of steps 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Number of indirect words 1 — 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 1

control Reverse Forward
rotation rotation
Speed control

position stop

PVF
with fixed

Speed control with fixed position stop

absolute specification
PVR
follow-up
Position

PFSTART Position follow-up control start

CPSTART1 1-axis constant-speed control start

CPSTART2 2-axes constant-speed control start

CPSTART3 3-axes constant-speed control start

CPSTART4 4-axes constant-speed control start

ABS-1

ABS-2

ABS-3

ABS-4

ABS
Constant-speed control

Constant-speed control passing point

ABS
absolute specification
ABS

ABS

ABS

ABS

ABS

ABH

ABH

ABH
Constant-speed control passing point
ABH
helical absolute specification
ABH

ABH

ABH

9 - 10
 2
1
—
Starting angle

2
1
—
Amplitude

OSC

2
1
—
Frequency

1
1
Reference axis No. (Note-1)

1
1
—
Control unit

2
2
Speed limit value

1
1
Acceleration time

1
1
Deceleration time

1
1
Rapid stop deceleration time

1
1
—
Torque limit value
Parameter block

Deceleration processing

1
1
—
at stop input
Allowable error range for circular

2
1 interpolation
Positioning data

1
1

S-curve ratio

9 - 11
1

1/

Repeat condition
1(B)
Note-2
1

Program No.

Command speed
9 SERVO PROGRAMS FOR POSITIONING CONTROL

2
2

(constant speed)
2

Cancel

: Must be set.
Note-2
2

Skip
1(B) 1(B)
Note-2
1
1
Others (Note-2)

FIN acceleration/deceleration

(Note-2) : (B) indicates a bit device.

2

WAIT-ON/OFF
1(B)
Note-2

: Set if required.
Fixed position stop acceleration
1
1
—

/deceleration time
1
—

Fixed position stop

(Note-1) : Only reference axis speed specification.

1(B)
Note-2

4 to17

9 to 14
8 to 13
9 to 14
5 to 14
4 to 13
5 to 14
5 to 13
4 to 12
3 to 11
2 to 10
3 to 17
3 to 15
4 to 16
6 to 19
Number of steps
9 SERVO PROGRAMS FOR POSITIONING CONTROL

Table 9.2 Servo Instruction List (continued)

Positioning data
Common Arc/Helical

Address/travel value

Command speed

M-code
Dwell time

Torque limit value

Parameter block No.

Auxiliary point

Radius

Pitch
Axis

Central point
Positioning control

Instruction
Processing
symbol

Virtual enable —

Number of steps 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Number of indirect words 1 — 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 1

INC-1

INC-2

INC-3

INC-4

INC
Constant-speed control passing point
INC
incremental specification
INC

INC
Constant-speed control

INC

INC

INC

INH

INH

INH
Constant-speed control passing point
INH
helical incremental specification
INH

INH

INH

CPEND Constant-speed control end

9 - 12
 2
1
—
Starting angle

2
1
—
Amplitude

OSC

2
1
—
Frequency

1
1
Reference axis No. (Note-1)

1
1
—
Control unit

2
2
Speed limit value

1
1
Acceleration time

1
1
Deceleration time

1
1
Rapid stop deceleration time

1
1
—
Torque limit value
Parameter block

Deceleration processing

1
1
—
at stop input
Allowable error range for circular

2
1
interpolation
Positioning data

1
1

S-curve ratio

9 - 13
1

1/

Repeat condition
1(B)
Note-2
1

Program No.

Command speed
9 SERVO PROGRAMS FOR POSITIONING CONTROL

2
2

(constant speed)
2

Cancel

: Must be set.
Note-2
2

Skip
1(B) 1(B)
Note-2
1
1
Others (Note-2)

FIN acceleration/deceleration

(Note-2) : (B) indicates a bit device.

2

WAIT-ON/OFF
1(B)
Note-2

: Set if required.
Fixed position stop acceleration
1
1
—

/deceleration time
1
—

Fixed position stop

(Note-1) : Only reference axis speed specification.

1(B)
Note-2

1 to 2
9 to 14
8 to 13
9 to 14
5 to 14
4 to 13
5 to 14
5 to 13
4 to 12
3 to 11
2 to 10
Number of steps
9 SERVO PROGRAMS FOR POSITIONING CONTROL

Table 9.2 Servo Instruction List (continued)

Positioning data
Common Arc/Helical

Address/travel value

Command speed

M-code
Dwell time

Torque limit value

Parameter block No.

Auxiliary point

Radius

Pitch
Axis

Central point
Positioning control

Instruction
Processing
symbol

Virtual enable —

Number of steps 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Number of indirect words 1 — 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 1

FOR-TIMES
control, constant-
(used in speed

speed control)
same control
Repetition of

switching

FOR-ON Repeat range start setting

FOR-OFF

NEXT Repeat range end setting

Simultaneous
start

START Simultaneous start

position
Home

return

ZERO Home position return start

High speed
oscillation

OSC High-speed oscillation

Servomotor/Virtual Servomotor Shaft

CHGA
Current Value

Current Value Change

change

CHGA-E Encoder current value change

CHGA-C CAM shaft current value change

9 - 14
 2
1
—
Starting angle

2
1
—
Amplitude

OSC

2
1
—
Frequency

1
1
Reference axis No. (Note-1)

1
1
—
Control unit

2
2
Speed limit value

1
1
Acceleration time

1
1
Deceleration time

1
1
Rapid stop deceleration time

1
1
—
Torque limit value
Parameter block

Deceleration processing

1
1
—
at stop input
Allowable error range for circular

2
1 interpolation
Positioning data

1
1

S-curve ratio

9 - 15
1

1/

Repeat condition
1(B)
Note-2
1

Program No.

Command speed
9 SERVO PROGRAMS FOR POSITIONING CONTROL

2
2

(constant speed)
2

Cancel
Note-2
2

Skip
1(B) 1(B)
Note-2

: Must be set.
1
1
Others (Note-2)

FIN acceleration/deceleration
2

WAIT-ON/OFF
1(B)
Note-2

Fixed position stop acceleration

1
1

(Note-2) : (B) indicates a bit device.

—

/deceleration time

: Set if required.
1
—

Fixed position stop

1(B)
Note-2

(Note-1) : Only reference axis speed specification.

2

3
2
3

2 to 3

5 to 10
Number of steps
9 SERVO PROGRAMS FOR POSITIONING CONTROL

9.3 Positioning Data

The positioning data set in the servo programs is shown in Table 9.3.
Refer to "Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller (SV13/SV22) Programming
Manual (REAL MODE)" for details.

Table 9.3 Positioning data

Setting value using MT Developer2
Setting range
Name Explanation Default
value mm inch degree PLS

• Set based on which parameter block to use

Parameter block
during both acceleration/ deceleration 1 1 to 64
No.
processing and STOP input.
• Set the starting axis.
Axis • The interpolation starting axis No. during 1 to 32 (Note-6)
interpolation.
Set the positioning address as an -214748364.8 -21474.83648 -2147483648
Absolute data
Address absolute address. to 214748364.7 to 0 to 359.99999 to
method
[µm] 21474.83647 2147483647
Set the positioning address as an Expect for the speed/position switching control
Address/travel value

incremental travel value. Travel 0 to 2147483647

direction is indicated by the sign. Speed/position switching control
Only positive settings can be made
Incremental Travel during speed/position control.
data method value Positive : Forward rotation 0 to
(address increase direction) 0 to 0 to 0 to
214748364.7
Negative: Reverse rotation 21474.83647 21474.83647 2147483647
[µm]
Common Settings

(address decrease direction)

• Sets the positioning speed.

• Units for speed are the "control units" set in
0.001 to
the parameter block. 0.01 to 0.001 to 1 to
2147483.647
Command speed • Becomes either vector speed long-axis 6000000.00 600000.000 2147483647
[degree/min]
reference speed or reference axis speed [mm/min] [inch/min] (Note-5) [PLS/s]
during interpolation moves. (PTP control
only)
• The time until the positioning complete signal
Dwell time (M2401+20n) is output after reaching the 0[ms] 0 to 5000[ms]
positioning address.
• Set the M-code.
• Set for each point at the speed-switching
M-code 0 0 to 32767
control and constant-speed control.
• Updated it at the start or at a specified point.
• Set the torque limit value. Torque limit
• The torque limit is performed based on the setting
starting parameter block data. Speed- valued [%]
Torque limit value 1 to 1000[%]
switching control can be set for each point in the
and torque limit values can be set at specific parameter
points. block

9 - 16
9 SERVO PROGRAMS FOR POSITIONING CONTROL

Setting value using the Motion SFC program (Indirect setting) Indirect setting Processing at the setting error
Setting range Error item information
Possible/ Number of Control using
(Stored in SD517) Not start
mm inch degree PLS not possible used words (Note-4) default value

1 to 64 1 1

-2147483648 -2147483648
0 to 35999999 -2147483648
to 2147483647 to 214748647
( 10-5[degree]) to 2147483647
( 10-1[µm]) ( 10-5[inch]) n03 (Note-1)
Except for speed/position switching control
0 to 214783647
Speed/position switching control
2

0 to 2147483647 0 to 2147483647 0 to 2147483647 0 to

( 10-1[µm]) ( 10-5[inch]) ( 10-5[degree]) 2147483647

1 to 2147483647
1 to 600000000 1 to 600000000 1 to
( 10-3 (Note-2) (Note-3)
( 10-2 ( 10-3 2147483647 2 4
[degree/min])
[mm/min]) [inch/min]) (Note-5) [PLS/s]

0 to 5000[ms] 1 5

0 to 32767 1 6

1 to 1000[%] 1 7

(Note-1): The "n" in n03, n08, n09 and n10, indicates the axis No. (1 to 32).
(Note-2): When an error occurs because the speed limit value is exceeded, it is controlled at the speed limit value.
(Note-3): Applies when the command speed is "0".
(Note-4): If there are multiple errors in the same program, the latest error item information is stored.
(Note-5): When the "speed control 10 multiplier setting for degree axis" is set to "valid", the setting range is 0.01 to 21474836.47 [degree/min].
(Note-6): If 2 axes are set, an error will be happened when the servo program starts.

9 - 17
9 SERVO PROGRAMS FOR POSITIONING CONTROL

Table 9.3 Positioning data (Continued)

Setting value using MT Developer2
Setting range
Name Explanation Default
value mm inch degree PLS

• Set at the auxiliary point-specified circular -214748364.8 to

Absolute -21474.83648 -2147483648
Auxiliary

interpolation. 214748364.7 0 to 359.99999

point

data method to 21474.83647 to 2147483647

[μm]
Incremental
0 to 2147483647
data method
• Set at the radius-specified circular 0.1 to
Circular Interpolation

Absolute 0.00001 to
interpolation. 429496729.5 0 to 359.99999 1 to 4294967295
data method 42949.67295
Radius

• The sitting ranges depending on the [μm]

positioning method is shown to the right. 0.1 to
Incremental 0.00001 to 0.00001 to
214748364.7 1 to 2147483647
data method 21474.83647 21474.83647
[μm]
• Set at the central point-specified circular -214748364.8 to
Absolute -21474.83648 -2147483648
interpolation. 214748364.7 0 to 359.99999
Central
point

data method to 21474.83647 to 2147483647

[μm]
Incremental
0 to 2147483647
data method
Number of pitches • Set at the helical interpolation. 0 to 999
Control unit(Note-7) • Can only be set to items of the specified 3 0 1 2 3
parameter block which are to be changed. 0.001 to
0.01 to 0.001 to 1 to
• Refer to Section 4.3 "Parameter Block" for 200000 2147483.647
Speed limit value 6000000.00 600000.000 2147483647
details of each data. [PLS/s] [degree/min]
[mm/min] [inch/min] (Note-5) [PLS/s]

Acceleration time 1000[ms] 1 to 65535[ms]

Parameter block

Deceleration time 1000[ms] 1 to 65535[ms]

Rapid stop
1000[ms] 1 to 65535[ms]
deceleration time
S-curve ratio 0[%] 0 to 100[%]
Torque limit value 300[%] 1 to 1000[%]
Deceleration
0: Deceleration stop based on the deceleration time
processing on 0
1: Deceleration stop based on the rapid stop deceleration time
STOP input
Allowable error
0 to 10000.0
range for circular 100[PLS] 0 to 1.00000 0 to 1.00000 0 to 100000
[μm]
interpolation(Note-7)

9 - 18
9 SERVO PROGRAMS FOR POSITIONING CONTROL

Setting value using the Motion SFC program (Indirect setting) Indirect setting Processing at the setting error
Setting range Error item information
Possible/ Number of used Control using
(Stored in SD517) Not start
mm inch degree PLS not possible words (Note-4) default value

-2147483648 to -2147483648
0 to 35999999 -2147483648
2147483647 to 2147483647
( 10-5[degree]) to 2147483647
( 10-1[μm]) ( 10-5[inch]) 2 2 n08 (Note-1)

0 to 2147483647

1 to 4294967295 1 to 4294967295 0 to 35999999 1 to

( 10-1[μm]) ( 10-5[inch]) ( 10-5[degree]) 4294967295
2 n09 (Note-1)
1 to 2147483647 1 to 2147483647 1 to 2147483647 1 to
( 10-1[μm]) ( 10-5[inch]) ( 10-5[degree]) 2147483647

-2147483648 -2147483648
0 to 35999999 -2147483648
to 2147483647 to 2147483647
( 10-5[degree]) to 2147483647
( 10-1[μm]) ( 10-5[inch]) 2 2 n10 (Note-1)

0 to 2147483647

0 to 999 1 28
0 1 2 3 1 11
1 to 2147483647
1 to 600000000 1 to 600000000 1 to
-2 -3 ( 10-3
( 10 ( 10 2147483647 2 12
[degree/min])
[mm/min]) [inch/min]) (Note-5) [PLS/s]

1 to 65535[ms] 1 13
1 to 65535[ms] 1 14

1 to 65535[ms] 1 15

0 to 100[%] 1 21
1 to 1000[%] 1 16
0: Deceleration to a stop in accordance with the deceleration time
1: Deceleration to a stop in accordance with the rapid stop 1
deceleration time

1 to 100000 1 to 100000 1 to 100000 1 to 100000

2 17
( 10-1[μm]) ( 10-5[inch]) ( 10-5[degree]) [PLS]

(Note-1): The "n" in n03, n08, n09 and n10, indicates the axis No. (1 to 32).
(Note-4): If there are multiple errors in the same program, the latest error item information is stored.
(Note-5): When the "speed control 10 multiplier setting for degree axis is set to "valid", is 0.01 to 21474836.47 [degree/min].
(Note-7): The setting value is invalid in Real mode.

9 - 19
9 SERVO PROGRAMS FOR POSITIONING CONTROL

Table 9.3 Positioning data (Continued)

Setting value using MT Developer
Setting range
Name Explanation Default
value mm inch degree PLS

Repeat condition Set the repeat conditions between FOR-

(Number of TIMES instruction and NEXT instruction. 1 to 32767
repetitions)
Repeat condition Set the repeat conditions between FOR-
X, Y, M, B, F, U \G
(ON/OFF) ON/OFF instruction and NEXT instruction.
Program No. Set the program No. for simultaneous start. 0 to 4095
Set the speed for points on the way in the 0.001 to
0.01 to 0.001 to 1 to
Command speed servo program. 2147483.647
6000000.00 600000.000 2147483647
(constant-speed) [degree/min]
[mm/min] [inch/min] (Note-5) [PLS/s]

Set to stop execution of a servo program by

Cancel deceleration stop by turning on the specified X, Y, M, B, F, U \G
bit device in the servo program.
Set to cancel positioning to pass point and
execute the positioning to the next point by
Others

Skip turning on the specified bit device during X, Y, M, B, F, U \G

positioning at each pass point for constant-
speed control instruction.
Set to execute positioning to each pass point
FIN acceleration/
for constant-speed control instruction by 1 to 5000[ms]
deceleration
turning on the FIN signal.
Set to make state of the waiting for execution
by constant-speed control and execute the
WAIT-ON/OFF X, Y, M, B, F, U \G
positioning immediately by turning on/off the
command bit device.
Acceleration/deceleration time used in the
Fixed position stop
starting of speed control with fixed position
acceleration/ 1 to 65535[ms]
stop, speed change request (CHGV) or fixed
deceleration time
position stop command ON.
Command bit device of fixed position stop is
Fixed position stop X, Y, M, B, F, U \G
set.

9 - 20
9 SERVO PROGRAMS FOR POSITIONING CONTROL

Table 9.3 Positioning data (Continued)

Setting value using the Motion SFC program (Indirect setting) Indirect setting Processing at the setting error
Setting range Error item information
Possible/ Number of used Control using
(Stored in SD517) Not start
mm inch degree PLS not possible words (Note-4) default value

1 to 32767 1 18 Control by K1

0 to 4095 1 19
1 to 2147483647
1 to 600000000 1 to 600000000 1 to
-2 -3 ( 10-3 (Note-2) (Note-3)
( 10 ( 10 2147483647 2 4
[degree/min])
[mm/min]) [inch/min]) (Note-5) [PLS/s]

Control by
1 to 5000[ms] 1 13
1000[ms]

Control by
1 to 65535[ms] 1 13
1000[ms]

(Note-2): When an error occurs because the speed limit value is exceeded, it is controlled at the speed limit value.
(Note-3): Applies when the command speed is "0".
(Note-4): If there are multiple errors in the same program, the latest error item information is stored.
(Note-5): When the "speed control 10 multiplier setting for degree axis is set to "valid", is 0.01 to 21474836.47 [degree/min].

9 - 21
9 SERVO PROGRAMS FOR POSITIONING CONTROL

MEMO

9 - 22
10 MOTION SFC PROGRAMS

10. MOTION SFC PROGRAMS

10.1 Motion SFC Performance Specifications

This chapter describes the Motion SFC program.

Refer to "Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller (SV13/SV22) Programming
Manual (Motion SFC)" for details.

(a) Motion SFC Performance Specifications

Item Specifications
Code total
(Motion SFC chart + Operation control 543k bytes
Motion SFC program capacity + Transition)
Text total
484k bytes
(Operation control + Transition)
Number of Motion SFC programs 256 (No.0 to 255)
Motion SFC chart size/program Up to 64k bytes (Included Motion SFC chart comments)
Number of Motion SFC steps/program Up to 4094 steps
Motion SFC program
Number of selective branches/branch 255
Number of parallel branches/branch 255
Parallel branch nesting Up to 4 levels
4096 with F(Once execution type) and FS(Scan execution type)
Number of operation control programs
combined. (F/FS0 to F/FS4095)
Number of transition programs 4096(G0 to G4095)
Operation control program Code size/program Up to approx. 64k bytes (32766 steps)
(F/FS) Number of blocks(line)/program Up to 8192 blocks (in the case of 4 steps(min)/blocks)
/ Number of characters/block Up to 128 (comment included)
Transition program Number of operand/block Up to 64 (operand: constants, word device, bit devices)
(G) ( ) nesting/block Up to 32 levels
Operation control program Calculation expression/bit conditional expression
Descriptive
Calculation expression/bit conditional expression/
expression Transition program
comparison conditional expression
Number of multi execute programs Up to 256
Number of multi active steps Up to 256 steps/all programs
Normal task Execute in main cycle of Motion CPU
Execute in fixed cycle
Event task Fixed cycle
Execute specification (0.44ms, 0.88ms, 1.77ms, 3.55ms, 7.11ms, 14.2ms)
Executed (Execution
External
task can be None
interrupt
masked.)
PLC interrupt None
NMI task None

10

10 - 1
10 MOTION SFC PROGRAMS

(a) Motion SFC Performance Specifications(continued)

Item Specifications
I/O (X/Y) points 8192 points
I/O (PX/ PY) points Internal I/F (Input 4 points/ Output 2 points)
internal relays (M) 12288 points
Link relays (B) 8192 points
Annunciators relays (F) 2048 points
Number of devices
Special relays (SM) 2256 points
(Device in the Motion
Data registers (D) 8192 points
controller only)
Link registers (W) 8192 points
(included the positioning
Special registers (SD) 2256 points
dedicated device)
Motion registers (#) 12288 points
Coasting timers (FT) 1 point (888μs)
Multiple CPU area device None

10 - 2
10 MOTION SFC PROGRAMS

10.2 Motion SFC Chart Symbol List

Motion SFC program components are shown below. The operation sequence or
transition control is expressed by connecting these symbols with directed lines in the
Motion SFC program.
Symbol
Classification Name List Representation Function
(Code size (byte))

Program name • Indicates a program entry an its name.

START Program name • Specify this program name with a subroutine call.
(0) • Only one program name per program.

Program
start/end • Indicates a program end (exit).
• When a subroutine call is carried out, returns to the call
END END END source program.
• It is possible to use one, multiple or zero END
(8)
commands in a single program.

Motion control Kn
CALL Kn • Starts a servo program Kn (K0 to K4095).
step
(8)
Single
execution type Fn • Executes the operation control program Fn a single
CALL Fn
operation time (F0 to F4095).
control step (8)

Scan execution
FSn • Repeats an operation control program FSn (FS0 to
type operation CALL FSn
FS4095) until the next transition condition enables.
control step (8)
• When a WAIT command comes after GSUB , performs
a "subroutine call" and transfers control to the specified
program. Control returns to the call source program at
END execution.
Subroutine Program name • When anything other than WAIT comes after GSUB,
Step GSUB program name
call/start step performs "subroutine start", starts the specified
(8) program and transitions to the next (below) command
in the current program. The start source and
destination programs are executed simultaneously, and
the call destination program ends at END execution.

• Stops and ends the specified running program. After an

end, the program is started from its initial (start ) step
upon a program restart.
• When the specified program is in a "subroutine call",
CLR the subroutine program’s execution is also stopped.
Program name
Clear step CLR program name • When the specified program is after a "subroutine
(8) start", the subroutine program is not stopped.
• When clearing a "subroutine call", the specified
subroutine’s execution is stopped, the program returns
to the call source program, and then transitions to the
next step.

10 - 3
10 MOTION SFC PROGRAMS

Symbol
Classification Name List representation Function
(Code size (byte))
• If preceded by a motion control step, transitions to the
next step after meeting transition condition Gn (G0 to
G4095) without waiting for the motion operating
completion.
Shift • If preceded by an operation control step, transitions to
Gn
(Pre-read SFT Gn the next step after meeting the transition condition and
transition) (8) completing the operation execution.
• If preceded by a subroutine call or starting step,
transitions to the next step after meeting transition
condition without waiting for the completion of
subroutine operation.
• If preceded by a motion control step, waits for
completion of the motion operation and then transitions
to the next step after meeting the transition condition
Gn (G0 to G4095).
• If preceded by an operation control step, transitions to
Gn
WAIT WAIT Gn the next step after meeting the transition condition and
(8) after operation execution. (Same operation as Shift.)
• If preceded by a subroutine call or starting step, waits
for subroutine operation completion and then
transitions to the next step after meeting transition
condition.
• Prepares start conditions of the next motion control
Transition ON bit device
step and issues an instruction immediately when the
WAITON Kn WAITON bit device specified bit device turns ON.
• Always pair this transition with the motion control step
(14) one-for-one.
• Prepares start conditions of the next motion control
OFF bit device
step and issues an instruction immediately when the
WAITOFF Kn WAITOFF bit device specified bit device turns OFF.
• Always pair this transition with the motion control step
(14) one-for-one.
• If preceded by a motion control step, transitions to the
next step after meeting transition condition Gn (G0 to
G4095) without waiting for the motion operation
IFBm
completion. If transition condition is not met, transitions
IFT1
to the right-connected step.
(Not SFT Gn
completion • If preceded by an operation control step, transitions to
of condition) :
the next step after both meeting the transition condition
Gn JMP IFEm
Shift Y/N N operation execution completion. If the transition
(Completion Y IFT2
of condition) condition is not met, transitions to the right-connected
SFT Gn+?
step.
:
• If preceded by a "subroutine call" or "starting step",
JMP IFEm
transitions to the next step after meeting the transition
IFEm
condition without waiting for subroutine operation
completion. If transition condition is not met, transitions
to the right-connected step.

10 - 4
10 MOTION SFC PROGRAMS

Symbol
Classification Name List representation Function
(Code size (byte))
• If preceded by a motion control step, waits for motion
operation completion and then transitions to the next
step after meeting transition condition Gn (G0 to
IFBm
G4095). If transition condition is not met, transitions to
IFT1
the right-connected step.
WAIT Gn
(Not • If preceded by an operation control step, transitions to
completion :
of condition) the next step after meeting the transition condition and
JMP IFEm
Transition WAIT Y/N Gn after operation execution. If transition condition is not
N IFT2
(Completion Y met, transitions to the right-connected step.
of condition) WAIT Gn+?
(Same operation as Shift.)
:
• If preceded by a subroutine call or starting step, waits
JMP IFEm
for the subroutine operation completion, and then
IFEm
transitions to the next step after meeting the transition
condition. If the transition condition is not met,
transitions to the right-connected step.

Pn • Jumps to the specified pointer Pn (P0 to P16383)

Jump Jump JMP Pn
contained within the same program.
(14)
• Indicates a jump destination pointer (label).
• This pointer can be set at a step, transition, branch
Pn point or coupling point.
Pointer Pointer Pn
(8) • P0 to P16383 can be set in one program. The same
number may also be reused in other programs without
causing any conflicts.

10 - 5
10 MOTION SFC PROGRAMS

10.3 Branch and Coupling Chart List

Branch and coupling patterns which specify step and transition sequences in the
Motion SFC charts are shown below.
Name List
Motion SFC chart symbol Function
(Code size (byte)) representation
• Steps and transitions connected in series are
List processed in order from top to bottom.
representation • Steps and transitions need not be lined up
Series transition corresponding to alternately.
(Corresponding the Motion SFC • When a transition is omitted, unconditional shift
symbol size) chart symbols processing is performed.
shown in Section
4.2.

• The first route to meet the transition condition is

executed after executing the step or transition
CALL Kn
Selective branch preceding the branch.
IFBm IFBm
((Number of • Selective branch destinations should always be
branches + 2) IFT1 IFT2 IFT1 started by transitions which must be either all
SFT Gn
10) Shift’s or all WAIT’s. (Mixed use of Shift and WAIT
CALL Fn
together will cause a parallel branch.)
:
JMP IFEm
• After the route branched by a selective branch has
IFT2
been processed, execution shifts to a coupling
SFT Gn’
point.
CALL Fn’
• A coupling may be preceded and followed by either
Selective coupling :
a step or a transition.
(8) (JMP IFEm)
IFEm IFEm
CALL Fn’’

• Multiple routes (steps) connected in parallel are

Parallel branch CALL Kn executed simultaneously.
(Number of PABm • Each parallel branch destination may be started by
Basic PABm
branches 22 + PAT1 either a step or transition.
type
number of PAT1 PAT2 CALL Fn
coupling SFT Gn’
points 2 + 12) :
JMP PAEm
PAT2 • Execution waits at the coupling point of the parallel
CALL Fn’ branch output and shifts to the next step after all
SFT Gn’’ routes in the parallel branch have been completed.
: • A coupling may be preceded and followed by either
Parallel coupling
(JMP PAEm) a step or a transition.
(8)
PAEm PAEm • When this coupling is preceded by an FS step,
CALL Fn’’ scans are executed while waiting for the parallel
: branch to complete. After completed, scans are no
longer executed.
<Normal jump> <Coupling jump> 1) Normal jump
• After the step or transition preceding this jump
transition is executed, execution shifts to the
CALL Fn pointer Pn specified within its own program.
JMP Pn • The jump destination may either be a step or
transition.
• When a jump takes place from an FS step to a
Jump transition
transition, scans are executed while waiting for
(Corresponding
the completion of transition condition of the
symbol size)
jump destination.
2) Coupling jump
CALL Fn’ • When a jump to another route within a parallel
Pn branch takes place after a parallel branch, a
CALL Kn "coupling jump" occurs and execution waits at
the jump destination.

10 - 6
10 MOTION SFC PROGRAMS

Combining basic type branches/couplings provides the following application types.

List
Name Motion SFC chart symbol Function
representation
CALL Kn • After a selective branch, a parallel branch can be
IFBm performed.
IFT1
SFT Gn
IFBm
Selective branch PABm
IFT1 IFT2
| PAT1
PABm
Parallel branch CALL Fn
PAT1 PAT2
:
JMP PAEm
PAT2
CALL Fn’
:
• The selective coupling point can be the same as
(JMP PAEm)
the coupling point of a parallel coupling for
PAEm
selective branch parallel branch. Note that in the
JMP IFEm
Motion SFC chart, this type is displayed in order of
Parallel coupling a parallel coupling a selective coupling, as
IFT2
PAEm shown on the left.
| SFT Gn’
Selective coupling IFEm • In this case, a pointer (Pn) cannot be set between
CALL Fn’’
the parallel coupling point (PAEm) and the
:
selective coupling point (IFEm).
(JMP IFEm)
IFEm
SFT Gn’’
Appli- SFT Gn • After a parallel branch, a selective branch can be
cation PABm PABm performed.
type Parallel branch PAT1 PAT2
PAT1
IFBm
| CALL Fn
FIT1 FIT2
Selective branch
IFBm
IFT1
SFT Gn’
• The parallel coupling point can be the same as the
CALL Fn’
coupling point of a selective coupling for parallel
:
branch selective branch.
JMP IFEm
Note that in the Motion SFC chart, this type is
IFT2
displayed in order of a selective coupling a
SFT Gn’’
parallel coupling, as shown on the left.
CALL Fn’’
• In this case, a pointer (Pn) cannot be set between
:
the selective coupling point (IFEm) and the parallel
(JMP IFEm)
Selective coupling coupling point (PAEm).
IFEm
IFEm
|
JMP PAEm
Parallel coupling PAEm

PAT2
CALL Fn’’’
:
CALL Kn
(JMP PAEm)

PAEm
SFT Gn’’’

10 - 7
10 MOTION SFC PROGRAMS

List
Name Motion SFC chart symbol Function
representation
CALL Kn • After a selective branch, a selective branch can be
IFBm performed.
IFT1
SFT Gn
IFBm+1
IFBm
Selective branch IFT1
IFT1 IFT2
| SFT Gn’
IFBm+1
Selective branch :
IFT1 IFT2
JMP IFEm+1
IFT2
SFT Gn’’
:
(JMP IFEm+1)
IFEm+1
• The two selective coupling points for selective
JMP IFEm
branch selective branch can be the same.
Note that in the Motion SFC chart, this type is
IFT2
displayed in order of a selective coupling
SFT Gn’’’
Selective coupling selective coupling, as shown on the left.
CALL Fn’ • In this case, a pointer (Pn) cannot be set between
IFEm+1
| :
IFEm the selective coupling point (IFEm+1) and the
Selective coupling (JMP IFEm) selective coupling point (IFEm).

IFEm
SFT Gn’’’’
Appli-
:
cation
type CALL Kn • After a parallel branch, a parallel branch can be
PABm performed.
PAT1 • A parallel branch can be nested up to four levels.
SFT Gn
PABm
Parallel branch PAT1 PAT2 PABm+1
PABm+1
| PAT1
PAT1 PAT2
Parallel branch CALL Fn’
:
JMP PAEm+1
PAT2
CALL Fn’’
: • The two parallel coupling points for parallel branch
(JMP PAEm+1) parallel branch can be the same. Note that in the
PAEm+1 Motion SFC chart, this type is displayed in order of
JMP PAEm a parallel coupling parallel coupling, as shown
on the left.
PAT2 • In this case, a pointer (Pn) cannot be set between
Parallel coupling
PAEm+1 CALL Fn’’’ the parallel coupling point (PAEm+1) and the
|
PAEm
: parallel coupling point (PAEm).
Parallel coupling
CALL Kn
JMP PAEm

PAEm
SFT Gn’’’
:

10 - 8
10 MOTION SFC PROGRAMS

List
Name Motion SFC chart symbol Function
representation
: • The selective coupling point and parallel branch
(JMP IFEm) point can be the same.
IFEm Note that in the Motion SFC chart, this type is
PABm displayed in order of a selective coupling
PAT1 parallel branch, as shown on the left.
CALL Fn • In this case, a pointer (Pn) cannot be set between
Selective coupling IFEm
: the selective coupling point (IFEm) and the parallel
|
JMP PAEm branch point (PABm).
Parallel branch PABm
PAT2
PAT1 PAT2
CALL Fn’
:
(JMP PAEm)
PAEm
:
: • The parallel coupling point and selective branch
JMP PAEm point can be the same.
PAEm Note that in the Motion SFC chart, this type is
IFBm displayed in order of a parallel coupling
IFT1 selective branch, as shown on the left.
SFT Gn • Execution waits at the parallel coupling point and
Parallel coupling PAEm
: shifts to the selective branch.
|
IFBm JMP IFEm • In this case, a pointer (Pn) cannot be set between
Selective branch
IFT2 the parallel coupling point (PAEm) and the
IFT1 IFT2
SFT Gn’ selective branch point (IFBm).
:
(JMP IFEm)
Appli- IFEm
cation :
type : • The selective coupling point and selective branch
(JMP IFEm) point can be the same.
IFEm Note that in the Motion SFC chart, this type is
IFBm+1 displayed in order of a selective coupling
IFT1 selective branch, as shown on the left.
Selective coupling SFT Gn • In this case, a pointer (Pn) cannot be set between
| IFEm : the selective coupling point (IFEm) and the
Selective branch JMP IFEm+1 selective branch point (IFBm+1).
IFBm+1
IFT2
IFT1 IFT2 SFT Gn’
:
(JMP IFEm+1)
IFEm+1
: • The parallel coupling point and parallel branch
(JMP PAEm) point can be the same.
PAEm Note that in the Motion SFC chart, this type is
PABm+1 displayed in order of a parallel coupling
PAT1 parallel branch, as shown on the left.
CALL Fn • Execution waits at the parallel coupling point and
Parallel coupling
: shifts to the parallel branch.
| PAEm
JMP PAEm+1 • In this case, a pointer (Pn) cannot be set between
Parallel branch
PABm+1 PAT2 the parallel coupling point (PAEm) and the parallel
PAT1 PAT2 CALL Fn’ branch point (PABm+1).
:
(JMP PAEm+1)
PAEm+1
:

10 - 9
10 MOTION SFC PROGRAMS

10.4 Operation/Transition Control Specifications

(1) Table of Operation/Transition Control Specifications

Item Specifications Remark

Returns a numeric result.

Calculation expression Expressions for calculating indirectly specified data using constants D100+1,SIN(D100), etc.
and word devices.
Bit conditional Returns a true or false result. M0, !M0, M1*M0,
Expression
expression Expression for judging ON or OFF of bit device. (M1+M2)*(!M3+M4), etc.
Conditional
Comparison
expression Expressions for comparing indirectly specified data and calculation D100==100
conditional
expressions using constants and word devices. D10<D102+D10, etc.
expression
The input X/output Y are
Accessibility Usable tasks Description written with the actual input
Device Symbol
Read Write Normal Event example PX/actual output PY.
Input X X100 Set the I/O number of
Input
Actual Input PX PX180 "Actual inputs/ Actual
Output Y Y100 outputs (PX/PY)" to "First
Output I/O No" in "System
Actual Output PY PY1E0
Internal relay M M20 Structure" of MT
Developer2
Link relay B B3FF
DI : PX0 to PXFFF
Bit devices Annunciator F F0
DO : PY0 to PYFFF
Special relay SM SM0
: usable
: unusable
CAUTION
<Restrictions on write-enabled bit devices>
1) "X Devices" except " Actual inputs" can be written .
2) Special relay has predetermined applications in the system.
Do not perform write to other than the user setting device.

Accessibility Usable tasks Description

Devices Symbol
Read Write Normal Event example
Data register D DOL
Link register W W1F : F
Special register SD SD0
Motion register # #0F
Word devices Coasting timer FT FT
: usable
: unusable
CAUTION

<Restrictions on write-enabled word devices>

1) Special register has predetermined applications in the system.
Do not perform write to other than the user-set device.

10 - 10
10 MOTION SFC PROGRAMS

Table of the operation control/transition control specification (continued)

Item Specifications Remark

16-bit integer type (signed) -32768 to 32767

(None) K10, D100, etc.
16-bit integer type (unsigned) 0 to 65535
32-bit integer type (signed) -2147483648 to 2147483647
Data type L 2000000000, W100L, etc.
32-bit integer type (unsigned) 0 to 4294967295
64-bit floating-point type
F IEEE format 1.23, #10F, etc.
(double precision real number type)
Decimal
K The above data type symbol 'L' or '. (decimal point)' provided at the end
constant K-100, H0FFL, etc.
Constant indicates the data type. The constant without the data type is regarded
Hexadecimal as the applicable minimum type. 'K' may be omitted.
H
constant
Binary operation 6
Bit operation 6
Sign 1
Standard function 15
Type conversion 6
Number of
Bit device status 2 59 in total
instructions
Bit device control 5
Logical operation 4
Comparison operation 6
Motion dedicated function 2
Others 6
Read/write response Input response Direct read control at instruction execution.
of input PX, output PY Output response Direct write control at instruction execution.

CAUTION
If " Multi CPU common devices" are set, a SFC error will occur. (The error code depends on
the instructions, so refer to "Motion SFC error code list".)

10 - 11
10 MOTION SFC PROGRAMS

(2) Table of the operation control/transition instruction

Usable step
Y/N
transition's
Classification Symbol Function Format Basic steps
F/FS G conditional
expression

= Substitution (D)=(S) 4 —
+ Addition (S1)+(S2) 4 —
- Subtraction (S1)-(S2) 4 —
Binary operation
* Multiplication (S1)*(S2) 4 —
/ Division (S1)/(S2) 4 —
% Remainder (S1)%(S2) 4 —
~ Bit inversion (complement) ~(S) 2 —
& Bit logical AND (S1)&(S2) 4 —
| Bit logical OR (S1)|(S2) 4 —
Bit operation
^ Bit exclusive logical OR (S1)^(S2) 4 —
>> Bit right shift (S1)>>(S2) 4 —
<< Bit left shift (S1)<<(S2) 4 —
Sign - Sign inversion (complement of 2) -(S) 2 —
SIN Sine SIN(S) 2 —
COS Cosine COS(S) 2 —
TAN Tangent TAN(S) 2 —
ASIN Arcsine ASIN(S) 2 —
ACOS Arccosine ACOS(S) 2 —
ATAN Arctangent ATAN(S) 2 —
SQRT Square root SQRT(S) 2 —
Standard function LN Natural logarithm LN(S) 2 —
EXP Exponential operation EXP(S) 2 —
ABS Absolute value ABS(S) 2 —
RND Round-off RND(S) 2 —
FIX Round-down FIX(S) 2 —
FUP Round-up FUP(S) 2 —
BIN BCD BIN conversion BIN(S) 2 —
BCD BIN BCD conversion BCD(S) 2 —
SHORT Convert into 16-bit integer type (signed) SHORT(S) 2 —
USHORT Convert into 16-bit integer type (unsigned) USHORT(S) 2 —
LONG Convert into 32-bit integer type (signed) LONG(S) 2 —

Type conversion ULONG Convert into 32-bit integer type (unsigned) ULONG(S) 2 —
Regard as signed data and convert into 64-
FLOAT FLOAT(S) 2 —
bit floating point type
Regard as unsigned data and convert into
UFLOAT UFLOAT(S) 2 —
64-bit floating point type
(None) ON (normally open contact) (S) 2
Bit device status
! OFF (normally closed contact) !(S) 2
SET(D) 3 —
SET Device set SET(D)= (conditional
4 —
expression)
RST(D) 3 —
RST Device reset RST(D)=(conditional
Bit device control 4 —
expression)
DOUT Device output DOUT(D),(S) 4 —
DIN Device input DIN(D),(S) 4 —
OUT(D)=(conditional
OUT Bit device output 4 —
expression)

10 - 12
10 MOTION SFC PROGRAMS

Table of the operation control/transition instruction (continued)

Usable step
Y/N
transition's
Classification Symbol Function Format Basic steps
F/FS G conditional
expression

(None) Logical acknowledgment (Conditional expression) 0

! Logical negation !(Conditional expression) 2
(Conditional expression) *
Logical operation * Logical AND 4
(conditional expression)
(Conditional expression) +
+ Logical OR 4
(conditional expression)
(Conditional expression) ==
== Equal to 4
(conditional expression)
(Conditional expression) !=
!= Not equal to 4
(conditional expression)
(Conditional expression) <
< Less than 4
Comparison (conditional expression)
operation (Conditional expression) <=
<= Less than or equal to 4
(conditional expression)
(Conditional expression) >
> More than 4
(conditional expression)
(Conditional expression) >=
>= More than or equal to 4
(conditional expression)
Motion dedicated CHGV Speed change request CHGV((S1),(S2)) 4 —
function CHGT Torque limit value change request CHGT((S1),(S2)) 4 —
EI Event task enable EI 1 —
DI Event task disable DI 1 —
NOP No operation NOP 1 —
BMOV Block transfer BMOV(D),(S),(n) 6 —
FMOV Same data block transfer FMOV(D),(S),(n) 6 —
Write device data to CPU shared memory
MULTW MULTW(D),(S),(n),(D1) 8 —
Others of the self CPU
Read device data from CPU shared
MULTR MULTR(D),(S1),(S2),(n) 7 —
memory of the other CPU
Write device data to intelligent function
TO TO(D1),(D2),(S),(n) 7 —
module.
Read device data from intelligent function
FROM FROM(D),(S1),(S2),(n) 7 —
module.
TIME Time to wait TIME(S) 7 — —

CAUTION
If an unavailable "Operation control" or "Transition instruction" is set, a "Motion SFC program
start error" will occur.

(3) Rough calculation expression of single program for operation

control/transition program
2 + (1 + Total number of basic steps in 1 block
+ Number of 32-bit constants/1 block 1
+ Number of 64-bit constants/1 block 3) Number of blocks (steps)
(1 step = 2 bytes)

10 - 13
10 MOTION SFC PROGRAMS

10.5 Program Parameters

Set the following parameters for every Motion SFC program.

No. Item Setting range Initial value Remark
1 Start setting Automatically started or not Not setting
Can be either a normal, event or NMI task. Normal task
When you have set the event task, further set the
event.
1. Fixed cycle
2 Execute task
Can be either 0.44ms, 0.88ms, 1.77ms, 3.55ms, None
7.11ms,14.2ms or none.
These parameters are
The same event can be shared among multiple Motion
imported at leading edge of
SFC programs.
PLC ready flag (M2000) and
Number of 1 to 10 used for control thereafter.
3 consecutive Set the number of consecutive transitions toward the 1 When setting/changing the
transitions program set to the event . values of these parameters,
End/continue turn PLC ready flag (M2000)
END
4 Set the operation mode of the END step toward the End off.
operation
program set to the event .
None/Bit device
Set the bit device turned ON while executing Motion
SFC program.
5 Executing flag X0 to X1FFF None
Y0 to Y1FFF
M0 to M8191
B0 to B1FFF

10 - 14
10 MOTION SFC PROGRAMS

10.6 Device Descriptions

Word and bit device descriptions are shown below.

(1) Word device descriptions

Device descriptions
64-bit
32-bit
16-bit floating-point Device No. (n) specified ranges
integer type
integer type type
("n" is even No.)
("n" is even No.)
Data register Dn DnL DnF 0 to 8191
Link register Wn WnL Wn:F 0 to 1FFF
Special register SDn SDnL SDnF 0 to 2255
Motion device #n #nL #nF 0 to 12287
Coasting timer — FT — —

(a) For differentiation, the 32-bit floating-point type is ended by L

and the 64-bit floating-point type by F (F for the link register).
(b) For the 32-bit integer type and 64-bit floating-point type,
specify the device number with an even number. (It cannot be
set as an odd number).
(c) The coasting timer FT is incremented per 888[μs]. (The
coasting timer is a 32-bit integer type.)

(2) Bit device descriptions

Device description Device No. (n) specified ranges
Xn Xn : 0 to 1FFF
Input relay
PXn PXn : 0 to FFF
Yn Yn : 0 to 1FFF
Output relay
PYn PYn : 0 to FFF
Internal relay Mn 0 to 12287
Link relay Bn 0 to 1FFF
Annunciator Fn 0 to 2047
Special relay SMn 0 to 2255

(a) When using the device in DIN or DOUT as batch bit data,
specify "n" as a multiple of 16.

10 - 15
10 MOTION SFC PROGRAMS

MEMO

10 - 16
11 MECHANICAL SYSTEM PROGRAM

11. MECHANICAL SYSTEM PROGRAM

This section describes virtual mode of the mechanical system program. 11

In the mechanical system program (Mechanical support language), mechanical
hardware that historically has been used to perform synchronous control such as gears,
shafts, belts, pulleys, cams and variable speed changers, etc. are transposed to
software and the same operational control can be performed.
The mechanical system program consists of mechanical module connection diagrams
and mechanical module parameters.

• Mechanical module connection diagrams show a virtual mechanical system

consisting of multiple connected virtual mechanical modules.
• The mechanical module parameters are used to control of the mechanical modules
used at the mechanical module connection diagram.

Refer to the "Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller (SV13/SV22) Programming

Manual (VIRTUAL MODE)" for specifics of the mechanical module parameters.

11 - 1
11 MECHANICAL SYSTEM PROGRAM

11.1 Mechanical Module Connection Diagram

The mechanical module connection diagram depicts a virtual system composed of

user arranged mechanical modules.
Configuration of the mechanical module connection is shown in Fig. 11.1 below.

Indicates rotation direction

Virtual axis
Drive module Transmission module
Virtual main shaft

Virtual Differential Gear

servomotor gear

Drive module
Connection axis
Synchronous
encoder

Transmission module
Virtual
servomotor

Virtual auxiliary Clutch

Synchronous
encoder input axis

Differential
gear
Gear

Speed
Speed
change gear
change gear
Drive module
Clutch
Virtual
servomotor

Cam Output module

Synchronous
Output axis

encoder
Ball Rotary
Roller
screw table

1 block

1 system

Fig. 11.1 Configuration of the Mechanical Module Connection

POINT
(1) Either a virtual servomotor or a synchronous encoder can be connected to the
drive shaft.
(2) Either a cam, roller, ball screw or rotary table can be connected to the output
shaft.

11 - 2
11 MECHANICAL SYSTEM PROGRAM

(1) Block
The term "block" is one set of mechanical modules beginning after a virtual
transmission module (gear) connected to the virtual main shaft and ending at the
the output module.
Refer to Section 11.2 for the number of mechanical modules which can be
connected in a single block.

(2) System
The term "system" is a generic term of multiple blocks connected to one virtual
main shaft.
The maximum number of blocks allowable in a single system is 32.

(3) Transmission module connections

There are 3 transmission module connection patterns:
• Pattern 1....... Straight connection to output (i.e. no differential gear).
• Pattern 2....... Differential gear connection directly connected to the output
module (i.e. no speed change gear).
• Pattern 3....... Differential gear connection with a speed change gear on the
output side.

Pattern 1 Pattern 2 Pattern 3

Gear Gear Gear

A# #
A %
C

Output Differential Differential

Gear Gear
module gear gear

Speed
B B
change
gear

Drive Output Drive Output

module module module module

11 - 3
11 MECHANICAL SYSTEM PROGRAM

(a) Transmission modules which can be used in the above "A" and "B"
1) A clutch, speed change gear, and "clutch + speed change gear" can be
used in "A" and "B".
2) There are no restrictions on connection constraints if a "clutch + speed
change gear" combination is used.

Speed Speed
Clutch Clutch
change gear change gear

Speed
Clutch
change gear

(b) Transmission module which can be used in above "C" (pattern 3)

Only a clutch can be used in location "C".

11 - 4
11 MECHANICAL SYSTEM PROGRAM

11.2 Mechanical Module List

An overview of the mechanical modules used in the virtual mode connection diagram
is shown in Table 11.1.
Refer to the "Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller (SV13/SV22) Programming
Manual (VIRTUAL MODE)" for details of the mechanical modules.

Table 11.1 Mechanical Module List

Mechanical Module Maximum Number of Usable

Classifi- Number Number Per Block

Per Number Function Description
cation Auxiliary
Name Appearance Motion Per Connection
Input
CPU System Shaft Side
Axis Side
module
• Drives the virtual axis of the mechanical system program using the servo
Virtual program or a JOG operation .
3 3 –- –- • Axes 1 to 8 can be set as a Virtual axis.
servomotor
Drive Total Total
module 4 3 • Drives the virtual axis using input pulses from an external synchronous
Synchronous encoder..
1 1 –- –-
encoder

• This is a virtual "link shaft".

Virtual main
–- 1 1 –- –- • Drive module rotation is transferred to the transmission module.
shaft
Virtual Total • This is the auxiliary input axis to the transmission module’s differential
Virtual
axis 1 gear .
auxiliary –- 1 1 –- –- • Automatically displayed when a differential gear and standard gear are
input axis connected .
• Drive module rotation is transmitted to the output axis.
• The travel value (pulse) input from the drive module is transmitted to the
Gear 2 2 1 1 output axis as a function of the gear ratio and rotation direction defined by
the user in the module’s settings.
• Transmits or disconnects the drive module rotation to the output module.
• Direct clutches transmit directly to the output shaft while smoothing
clutches perform an acceleration/deceleration profile during ON/OFF
Direct clutch operation based on a set smoothing time-constant setting.
• ON/OFF mode, address mode can be selected to suit the application.
(The external input mode can not be selected to suit the application.)
• The smoothing clutch can be set to use a time-constant method or
2 2 1 1 slippage method.

Smoothing
Trans- clutch
mission
module • Changes the speed of an output module (roller).
• The setting speed change ratio is applied to input axis speed, and
Speed change transmits to the output axis.
2 2 1 1
gear

• Auxiliary input axis rotation is subtracted from the virtual main shaft
rotation and the result is transmitted to the output axis.
1 1 1
Differential
–-
gear • Auxiliary input axis rotation is subtracted from the virtual main shaft
rotation and the result is transmitted to the output axis.
1 1 –- (Connected to the virtual main shaft)

• Used to perform speed control.

Roller 1 1

• Used to perform linear positioning control.

Ball
1 1
screw
Output Total Total
1 1 • Used to perform angle control.
module 1 1
Rotary
1 1
table

• Position control executed based on cam pattern data setting.

• There are 2 cam control modes: two-way cam and feed cam.
Cam 1 1

11 - 5
11 MECHANICAL SYSTEM PROGRAM

11.3 Device range

The below devices can be used for "Indirect setting" of "Transmission module"
and "Output module" in Mechanical support language.

(1) Bit devices

Table 11.2 Bit devices List
Name Setting range
Input relay X0000 to X1FFF
Output relay Y0000 to Y1FFF
Internal relay M0 to M8191
Link relay B0000 to B1FFF
Annunciator F0 to F2047

(2) Word devices

Table 11.3 Word devices List
Name Setting range
Data register D0 to D8191
Link register W0 to W1FFF
Motion register #0 to #12287

Remark
An error will occur if the multi-CPU common devices
(for Q172DCPU/Q173DCPU) are set.

11 - 6
12 COMMUNICATION

12. COMMUNICATION

12.1 Connection to peripheral devices

There are two ways to communicate between the Motion controller and a computer:
"Direct connection" and "Hub Connection".
Ethernet cables and parameters are different for "Direct connection" and "Hub
12
Connection".
Please note there are two types of Ethernet cables: "Crossover cable" and "Straight
cable". Refer to the section 2.1(2).

12.2 Direct connection

"Direct connection" uses an Ethernet cable between the Motion controller and a
computer.
Select "Direct connection" on the "Transfer Setup" screen of MT Developer2.
* No need to set "IP address", "IP Input Format" or "Protocol".

Computer
PULL

Ethernet cable (Crossover cable)

PERIPHERAL I/F (Ethernet)

MT Developer2

(1) Direct connection settings

Select "Ethernet Port Direct connection" on the Transfer Setup screen.

Transfer Setup
(Online > Transfer Setup)

Select "Ethernet Board"

Double click "PLC

Module"

12 - 1
12 COMMUNICATION

CPU side I/F Detailed Setting of PLC Module

(Online > Transfer Setup > CPU side I/F Detailed Setting of PLC Module)

Select "Ethernet Port

Direct connection"

(2) Note
(a) When you want to use a hub, refer to next section "Hub Connection"

Computer
㪟㪬㪙
PULL

(b) Do not connect to a LAN with "Direct connection" setting. The LAN line will
become busy and may effect communication of other equipment on the LAN.

(c) IP address setting does not matter when using a direct connection. However,
communication may fail with the below conditions.

•In the Motion controller IP address, bits corresponding to "0" in the

computer subnet mask are all ON (255) or all OFF (0).
[Example] Motion controller IP address: 64. 64.255.255
Personal computer IP address: 64. 64. 1. 1
Personal computer subnet mask: 255.255. 0. 0

•In the Motion controller IP address, bits corresponding to the computer IP

address for each class in the personal computer IP address are all ON (255)
or all OFF (0).
[Example] Motion controller IP address: 64. 64.255.255
Personal computer IP address: 192.168. 0. 0
Personal computer subnet mask: 255. 0. 0. 0

12 - 2
12 COMMUNICATION

12.3 Hub Connection

The Motion controller can be connected to multiple computers through a hub.

Computer
PULL

㪜㫋㪿㪼㫉㫅㪼㫋㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼
㩿㫊㫋㫉㪸㫀㪾㪿㫋㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㪀 㪜㫋㪿㪼㫉㫅㪼㫋㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼
㩿㫊㫋㫉㪸㫀㪾㪿㫋㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼㪀

㪧㪜㪩㪠㪧㪟㪜㪩㪘㪣㩷㪠㪆㪝
㩿㪜㫋㪿㪼㫉㫅㪼㫋㪀

㪧㪸㫅㪼㫃㩷
㪺㫆㫄㫇㫌㫋㪼㫉
㪟㪬㪙

(1) Hub connection settings

Before connection with a hub can be made, the Motion controller’s settings must
be changed using a direct connection method.

(a) Connecting an Ethernet cable (Crossover cable)

Connect an Ethernet cable (Crossover cable) between the Motion controller
and a computer.

(b) Setting IP address of the Motion controller

Set the IP address located in the "Built-in Ethernet Port Setting" tab.
The default IP address value is [192.168.3.39]
Refer to (2)Note about IP address value setting.
No need to set "Subnet Mask Pattern" or "Default Router IP Address".

"Built-in Ethernet Port Setting"

(System Setting > Basic Setting > Built-in Ethernet Port Setting)

Set IP address
Refer to (2) Note

12 - 3
12 COMMUNICATION

(c) "Open Setting" of the Motion controller

Select TCP or UDP to correspond to current setting of the computer.
TCP is recommended, because of the quality of the communication.

"Open Setting"
(System Setting > Basic Setting > Built-in Ethernet Port Setting > Open Setting)

(d) Writing parameters

Write parameters to the Motion controller.
(Crossover cable must be used for this step.)

(e) Changing cables

Power off the Motion controller, then change the Ethernet cable from a
crossover cable to a straight cable.

Equipment Ethernet cable

The Motion controller — Hub Straight cable
All Computers — Hub Straight cable

(f) Enabling the parameters of the Motion controller

Once power returns to the Motion controller, the "Open Setting" IP address
and parameters will become enabled.

12 - 4
12 COMMUNICATION

(g) Transfer Setup of the computer (MT Developer2)

Select "Connection via Hub" on the Transfer Setup screen.

Transfer Setup
(Online > Transfer Setup)
Select "Ethernet Board"

Double click "PLC Module"

"CPU side I/F Detailed Setting of PLC Module"

Select "Connection via Hub"
Set the IP address to the same value as the IP address of the Motion
controller.
The default value of the IP address is [192.168.3.39]
Refer to part (2) of this chapter below regarding the IP address setting.

Select "Connection via Hub"

Set IP address
Refer to (2), on next page

"PC side I/F Ethernet Board Setting"

Select TCP or UDP to be same as "Open Setting"

12 - 5
12 COMMUNICATION

(2) Hub connection setting

(a) IP Address
The IP address of the Motion controller has to be considered when the IP
address of the computer is already set. The below setting is one example.
(For instance, the IP address of the computer is [192.168.1.1])

The IP address of the computer

For instance
[192.168.1.1] is already set as
the IP address of the computer.

"Built-in Ethernet Port Setting"

Set the values of these 3
columns to the same value as
the computer’s setting.

Be sure this column has a

different value than the
computer’s setting.

For example, [192.168.1.2] on

the controller when [192.168.1.1]
is set on the computer side.

Set this value to be the same as

the “Built-in Ethernet Port
Setting.
In this example, [192.168.1.2]

12 - 6
12 COMMUNICATION

(b) Up to 16 different equipment can access the Motion controller.

(c) Hub
The hub can be either a 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX port.
(It has to meet IEEE802.3 100BASE-TX or IEEE802.3 10BASE-T)

(d) The Ethernet cables must to be installed away from power cabling lines.

(e) The connections cannot be guaranteed under below conditions:

• Any connection made over the internet.
• Any connection made through a fire wall.
• Any connection made through a broadband router.
• Any connection made through a wireless LAN.

(f) When multiple Motion controllers are connected to MT Developer2, beware of

the below cautions:
• IP addresses must be different for each Motion controller.
• Different projects must be used for each Motion controllers on MT
Developer2.
• Only one instance each of the "Digital oscilloscope function" and "Test mode
function" can be used on a single computer at a time.

12 - 7
12 COMMUNICATION

12.4 Setting CPU name

(1) HUB connection setting

When setting up a connection to a hub, a label and comments can be added to
each controller in the CPU Name Setting tab of the Basic Settings window.
(Communication is still available even without defining a Label and/or Comment.)

"CPU Name Setting"

(System Setting > Basic Setting > CPU Name Setting)

Item Contents Length

Enter a label (name and/or
Label Up to 10 characters.
purpose) of the Motion controller.
Enter comments regarding the Up to 64 characters.
Comment
Motion controller.

The "Find CPU (Built-in Ethernet port) on Network" function in the "CPU side
I/F Detailed Setting of PLC Module" conveniently shows the below information
when MT Developer2 and the Motion controller are connected via the
PERIPHERAL I/F (Ethernet).
• IP address .
• CPU type.
• Label.
• Comment.

12 - 8
13 AUXILIARY FUNCTION

13. AUXILIARY FUNCTION

13.1 Mark detection function

The mark detect function latches various data such as "real current value", etc. when
a mark sensor (Digital input signal) input changes state.

Items Specification
Digital input signals DI1, DI2, DI3 and DI4
Valid on leading (rising) edge,
Input Module Detect Direction Valid on trailing (falling) edge.
13
(Selectable in "System Structure" of MT Developer2)
Mark input signal compensation time -32768 to 32767μs
Mark input accuracy 30μs
Total 7 types
Real current value, Feed current value,
Position feed back,
Feed current value of virtual servomotor,
Latch data Current value of synchronous encoder,
Current value within 1 cam shaft revolution,
(Real current value)
Current value within 1 cam shaft revolution,
(Feed current value)
Number of continuous
Up to 32
latch data that can be stored
Range of latch data -2147483648 to 2147483647

[Feature]
One type of data can be selected out of a total of 7 types.
Real current value, Feed current value, Position feed back,
Feed current value of virtual servomotor,
Current value of synchronous encoder
Current value within 1 cam shaft revolution. (Real current value)
Current value within 1 cam shaft revolution. (Feed current value)

[Detailed function]
It is possible store latch data to a device continuously.
The number of stored latch data can be set by the user. This is useful when latch data
is continuously input into the system.

<Example> One work /process has several marks. Every 4th mark is used by the
system.
(a) Set the value “4” to the "Specified number method" parameter and clear the
value of "Number of mark detection" so that it returns to "0".
(b) The system will wait until "Number of mark detection" reaches "4".
(c) Then the latch data relating to the mark input will be saved to the data storage
device.
13 - 1
13 AUXILIARY FUNCTION

[Devices list]
Items Contents Value Taking cycle Unit
#7912=H434D
#7913=H414D
Setting device

#7912,#7913 Registration codes #7914=H4B52

#7914,#7915 #7915=H4544
Main cycle -
#7916,#7917 These devices make the "Mark #7916=H4554
#7918,#7919 detection function" valid #7917=H5443
#7918=H4144
#7919=H4154

Mark detection function Setting range Fetch cycle/

Contents Unit
/Monitor value Refresh cycle
1 2 3 4
Mark detection signal allocation At setting of
#7920 #7940 #7960 #7980 1 to 4 —
devices registration code
Mark detection signals
#7921 #7941 #7961 #7981 -32768 to 32767 Operation cycle [μs]
compensation time
At setting of
Setting device

#7922 #7942 #7962 #7982 Latch data type 0 to 6 —

registration code
(Note-1) At setting of (Note-2)
#7923 #7943 #7963 #7983 Mark detection data axis number 1 to 8
registration code
#7926 #7946 #7966 #7986 -2147483648 to (Note-2)
Latch data upper limit Operation cycle
#7927 #7947 #7967 #7987 2147483647
#7928 #7948 #7968 #7988 -2147483648 to
Latch data lower limit Operation cycle —
#7929 #7949 #7969 #7989 2147483647
(Note-2)
#7930 #7950 #7970 #7990 Mark detection mode 0 to 32 Operation cycle
#8896 #8976 #9056 #9136 -2147483648 to (Note-2)
Mark detection data current monitor Operation cycle
#8897 #8977 #9057 #9137 2147483647
Upon detection
#8898 #8978 #9058 #9138 Number of marks detected 0 to 65535(Note-3) —
of mark signals
Monitor device

Mark detection settings verification

#8899 #8979 #9059 #9139 0 to 1 Main cycle —
flag
#8912 #8992 #9072 #9152
#8913 #8993 #9073 #9153
-2147483648 to Upon detection (Note-2)
to to to to Latch data storage area
2147483647 of mark signals
#8974 #9054 #9134 #9214
#8975 #9055 #9135 #9215
(Note-1): Refer to "(e) Mark detection data axis number"
(Note-2): It depends on the axis to which data is latched. ˜10 [Ǵm],˜10 [degree],˜10 [inch],[PLS]
-1 -5 -5

(Note-3): It depends on "Mark detection mode (#7930+20m)"

POINT
If the setting values are out of range, the mark detection functions are invalid.

13 - 2
13 AUXILIARY FUNCTION

[Data setting]
(1) Mark detection device settings
Up to 4 mark detection functions can be set.

(a) Registration code

(#7912,#7913,#7914,#7915,#7916,#7917,#7918,#7919)
When the specified data are set to "#7912 to #7919", the mark detection
functions become valid.
If anything other than the specified data is set, the mark detection functions
are invalid and at next power on, this incorrect data in "#7912 to #7919" is
cleared.
Below is an example of motion SFC.

#7912L=H414D434D
#7914L=H45444B52
#7916L=H54434554
#7918L=H41544144

(b) Mark detection signals allocation devices (#7920+20m)

These devices allocate between the digital inputs (DI1 to DI4) to the mark
detection functions.

Setting value Contents

1 The mark detection signal is allocated to DI1.
2 The mark detection signal is allocated to DI2.
3 The mark detection signal is allocated to DI3
4 The mark detection signal is allocated to DI4.

<Ex1> Each mark detection functions is allocated to a different digital inputs.

DI1
#7920=1 /CTMFGVGEVKQPHWPEVKQP
DI2
#7940=2 /CTMFGVGEVKQPHWPEVKQP
DI3
#7960=3 /CTMFGVGEVKQPHWPEVKQP
DI4
#7980=4 /CTMFGVGEVKQPHWPEVKQP

<Ex2> All mark detection functions are allocated to a digital input (DI1).

DI1
#7920=1 /CTMFGVGEVKQPHWPEVKQP
DI2
#7940=1 /CTMFGVGEVKQPHWPEVKQP
DI3
#7960=1 /CTMFGVGEVKQPHWPEVKQP
DI4
#7980=1 /CTMFGVGEVKQPHWPEVKQP

13 - 3
13 AUXILIARY FUNCTION

(c) Mark detection signal compensation time (#7921+20m) [Unit : μs]

Use these devices to compensate delay of sensors and so on.
Setting values Contents
-32768 to -1 Decrease in sensor delay. [μs]
0 to 32767 Increase in sensor delay. [μs]

(d) Latch data type (#7922+20m)

Select data type to latch, at the mark sensors are detected.
Setting Mark detection
Contents Unit
values data axis number
(Note-1)
0 Real current value 1
(Note-1)
1 Feed current value 1
2 Position feed back [PLS] 1
(Note-1)
3 Feed current value of virtual servomotor 1 to 8
(Note-1)
4 Current value of synchronous encoder 1
Current value within 1 cam shaft revolution. (Note-1)
5 1
(Real current value)
Current value within 1 cam shaft revolution. (Note-1)
6 1
(Feed current value)
(Note-1): It depends on the axis whose data is latched. ˜10 [Ǵm],˜10 [degree],˜10 [inch],[PLS]
-1 -5 -5

(e) Mark detection data axis number (#7923+20m)

Select the axis number for mark detection function.
With the exception of "Feed current value of virtual servomotor", only axis 1
can be selected. Please refer to the above table.

(f) Latch data upper limit (#7926+20m㧘#7927+20m)

Set the upper limit of latch data during mark detection.
Depends upon the relation of the upper limit and the lower limit.
Setting values Contents
All data greater than "Lower limit" and smaller than "Upper
Upper limit > Lower limit
limit" can be latched.
Upper limit = Lower limit All data can be latched.
Upper limit < Lower limit Mark detection function will not work.

(g) Latch data lower limit (#7928+20m㧘#7929+20m)

Set the lower limit of latch data during mark detection.
See the above table.

13 - 4
13 AUXILIARY FUNCTION

(h) Mark detection mode (#7930+20m)

Select the mark detection mode.
See the below table.
Setting values Contents
0 Continuous detection mode.
Specified number of detections mode.
1 to 32 The data continues to be latched until the specified number of
detections (#8898+80m) is reached.

(2) Mark detection monitor devices

These monitor devices show the status of the mark detection function.

(a) Mark detection data current monitor (#8896+80m㧘#8897+80m)

The current data selected can be monitored.

(b) Number of marks detected (#8898+80m)

Running count of each mark detected. The range depends upon the "Mark
detection mode (#7930+20m)"
• Continuous detection mode (#7930+20m= 0 to 65535)
After "65535" is reached, the count returns to "0". (Ring counter)
The latch data is always stored to #8912,#8913+80m.

• Specified number of detections mode (#7930+20m= 0 to 32)

Until "Number of marks detected (#8898+80m)" reaches the value of
#7930+20m, the latch data is stored to the "Latch data storing area".
Clear "Number of marks detected (#8898+80m)" before starting the mark
detection function.

POINT
(1) When "specified number of detections mode" is set as the
"Mark detection mode (#7930+20m)", clear "Number of
marks detected (#8898+80m)" set to "0". Otherwise mark
detection will not work correctly.

(c) Mark detection settings verification flag (#8899+80m)

When "Mark detection signals allocation devices (#7920+20m)", "Latch data
type (#7922+20m)" and "Mark detection data axis number (#7923+20m)" are all
correct, the verification flag (#8899+80m) will become "1".
If even one of the above three settings is incorrect, the verification flag
becomes "0".

13 - 5
13 AUXILIARY FUNCTION

(d) Latch data storage area (#8912,#8913+80m to #8974,#8975+80m)

There are 32 storage areas for detection.
• Continuous detection mode (#7930+20m=0)
The latch data is stored to #8912, #8913+80m upon every mark detection.
Latch data storage area
Latch data #8912, #8913 +80m

• Specified number of detections mode (#7930+20m=1 to 32)

Latch data is stored to the corresponding area up to the maximum number
specified by "Mark detection mode (#7930+20m)".
Latch data storage area
Latch data #8912, #8913 +80m
#8914, #8915 +80m
#8916, #8917 +80m
to
#8974, #8975 +80m

Remark
"m" (for example in #7920+20m) corresponds to the Mark detection function number.
Mark detection function number 1 2 3 4
m 0 1 2 3

[Timing chart]
(1) Timing of mark detection function verification.
When "Registration code (#7912 to #7919)" is set, and "Mark detection signal
allocation devices (#7920+20m)", "Latch data type (#7922+20m)" and " Mark
detection data axis number (#7923+20m)" are all correct, "Mark detection settings
verification flag (#8899+80m)" will be "1" and the mark detection functions
become valid.

Mark detection signals 1

allocated devices

Latch data type 0

Mark detection data 1

Axis number
#7912L=H414D434D
Registration code #7914L=H45444B52
#7916L=H54434554
#7918L=H41544144
Mark detection setting
verification flag

13 - 6
13 AUXILIARY FUNCTION

(2) Timing of the mark detection function (Continuous detection mode).

Latch data is stored to "Latch data storage area" upon mark detection.
"Number of Marks detected" is incremented by 1.

Mark detection setting

verification flag

Mark signals
(Raising edge mode)

Mark detection data Current value

current monitor

Number of 0 1 2
marks detected

Latch data storage area Current value1 Current value2

(3) Timing of the Mark detection function (Specified number of detections mode) .
For Mark detection function, first the "Number of marks detected(#8898+80m)"
should be cleared to "0".
When a mark detection signal turns on, "Latch data" will be stored to the first
"Latch data storage area" (#8912+80m, #8913+80m), and then the "Number of
marks detected" will be incremented by "+1".
The next mark detection signal stores the "Latch data" to the second "Latch data
storage area" (#8914+80m, #8915+80m), and then increments the "Number of
marks detected" by "+1" again.

Mark detection setting

verification flag

Mark signals
(Raising edge mode)

Mark detection data Current value

current monitor

㩿㪥㫆㫋㪼㪄㪈㪀

Number of 0 1 2
marks detected
Latch data storage area 1 Current value1
(#8912,#8913)
Latch data storage area 2 Current value2
(#8914,#8915)

(Note-1) : Clear "Number of marks detected (#8898+80m)" to "0"

13 - 7
13 AUXILIARY FUNCTION

13.2 High-Speed Reading of Specified Data

This function is used to store specified positioning data in a specified device (D,W) The
input signal of the Motion controller is used as a trigger and can be set in the system
settings of MT Developer2.

(1) Position data that can be set

Setting data Word No. Unit Remark
-1 -5 -5
Position command (Feed current value) 2 10 [μm],10 [inch],10 [degree],[PLS]
-1 -5 -5
Actual current value(Real current value) 2 10 [μm],10 [inch],10 [degree],[PLS]
Position droop (Deviation counter value) 2 [PLS]
M-code 1 -
Torque limit value 1 [%]
Motor current 1 [%]
Motor speed 2 [r/min]
Servo command value 2 [PLS]
Virtual servomotor feed current value 2 [PLS]
Synchronous encoder current value 2 [PLS]
Virtual servo M-code 1 -
Valid in virtual
Current value after main shaft differential gear 2 [PLS]
mode only
Current value within one revolution of cam axis 2 [PLS]
Execute cam No. 1 -
-1 -5
Execute stroke amount 2 10 [μm],10 [inch],[PLS]
Optional address (Fixed to 4 bytes) 2 -

(2) Signals used

Signals Read timing Number of setting points
PX devices (MR-MQ100) 0.4[ms] 4

(3) Devices that can be assigned

Word devices Devices
D 0 to 8191
W 0 to 1FFF

POINT
(1) When using 2 words of data, assign to an even number device.
(2) If wrong address is assigned, the motion controller will issue a "watch dog
timer error".

13 - 8
13 AUXILIARY FUNCTION

13.3 MC Protocol Communication

PERIPHERAL I/F of the Motion controller enables communication using the MC

protocol (Note-1).
External devices such as personal computers and display devices read/write device
data from/to the Motion controller using the MC protocol.
External devices monitor the operation of the Motion controller, analyze data, and
manage production by reading/writing device data.

REMARK
(Note-1): The MC protocol is an abbreviation for the MELSEC communication
protocol.
The MELSEC communication protocol is a name of the communication
method used to access CPU modules from external devices in accordance
with the communication procedure of Q-series programmable controllers
(such as serial communication modules, Ethernet modules).
For details on the MC protocol, refer to the "Q Corresponding MELSEC
Communication Protocol Reference Manual".

(1) Setting for MC protocol communication

Setting for communication using the MC protocol is described below.
Set the items of following (a) to (c) in the Built-in Ethernet Port Setting of the
Basic Setting of MT Developer2.

13 - 9
13 AUXILIARY FUNCTION

(a) Communication data code

Select a communication data code used for the MC protocol, "Binary code"
or "ASCII code".

(b) Enable online change (MC protocol)

Check the checkbox to enable online change when writing data to the
Motion controller from the external device that communicates using the MC
protocol.
For details on the available functions with this setting, refer to this section
(2).

(c) Open Setting

Set the following items.
1) Protocol
Select a connection used as MC protocol. (Up to 16 CPU modules can
be connected.)
2) Open System
Select "MC protocol".
3) Host Station Port No. (Required)
Set the host station port number (in hexadecimal).
• Setting range : 0401H to 1387H, 1392H to FFFEH
1) 2) 3)

POINT
When the "Enable online change (MC protocol)" box is unchecked, if a data write
request is sent from an external device to the Motion controller which is in the RUN
status, data will not be written to the Motion controller and the module returns the
NAK message.

13 - 10
13 AUXILIARY FUNCTION

(2) Command list

When the PERIPHERAL I/F of the Motion controller communicates using the MC
protocol, commands listed in table below can be executed.
Status of Motion controller
Command
Number of RUN
Function (Subcommand) Description
(Note-1) processed points STOP Write Write
enabled disabled
In units 0401 ASCII : 3584 points
Reads bit devices in units of one point.
of bits (0001) BIN : 7168 points
Batch read 960 words
In units 0401 Reads bit devices in units of 16 points.
(15360 points)
of words (0000)
Reads word devices in units of one point. 960 points
In units 1401 ASCII : 3584 points
Writes bit devices in units of one point.
of bits (0001) BIN : 7168 points
Batch write 960 words
In units 1401 Writes bit devices in units of 16 points.
(15360 points)
of words (0000)
Writes word devices in units of one point. 960 points
Reads bit devices in units of 16 or 32 points
by randomly specifying a device or device
Random read In units 0403 number.
(Note-2) 192 points
of words (0000) Reads word devices in units of one or two
points by randomly specifying a device or
Device
device number.
memory
Sets/resets bit devices in units of one point by
In units 1402
randomly specifying a device or device 188 points
of bits (0001)
number.
Sets/resets bit devices in units of 16 or 32
Test
points by randomly specifying a device or
(Random write) In units
1402 device number. (Note-5)
of words
(Note-2) (0000) Writes word devices in units of one or two
points by randomly specifying a device or
device number.
Monitor Registers bit devices to be monitored in units
registration In units 0801 of 16 or 32 points.
(Note-2), (Note-3), 192 points
of words (0000) Registers word devices to be monitored in
(Note-4)
units of one or two points.
In units 0802 Number of
Monitor Monitors devices registered.
of words (0000) registered points

: Available, : Not available

(Note-1): Subcommand is for the QnA-compatible 3E frame.
(Note-2): Devices such as TS, TC, SS, SC, CS, and CC cannot be specified in units of words.
For the monitor registration, an error (4032H) occurs during the monitor operation.
(Note-3): During monitor registration, monitor condition cannot be set.
(Note-4): Do not execute monitor registration from multiple external devices. If executed, the last monitor registration becomes valid.
(Note-5): Set the number of processed points so that the following condition is satisfied.
(Number of word access points) 12 + (Number of double-word access points) 14 1920
• Bit devices are regarded as 16 bits during word access and 32 bits during double-word access.
• Word devices are regarded as one word during word access and two words during double-word access.

13 - 11
13 AUXILIARY FUNCTION

(3) Available devices

The devices available in commands used in the MC protocol communication
function is shown below.

Device code
Classification Device ASCII code Device number range Remarks
(Note-1) Binary code

Internal system Special relay SM 91h 000000 to 002255 Decimal

—
device Special register SD A9h 000000 to 002255 Decimal
Input X 9Ch 000000 to 001FFF Hexadecimal Including actual input device PX.
Output Y 9Dh 000000 to 001FFF Hexadecimal Including actual input device PY.
Internal relay M 90h 000000 to 012287 Decimal
Internal user Annunciator F 93h 000000 to 002047 Decimal
device Link relay B A0h 000000 to 001FFF Hexadecimal
—
Data register D A8h 000000 to 008191 Decimal
Link register W B4h 000000 to 001FFF Hexadecimal
Motion register # E0h 000000 to 012287 Decimal

(Note-1): When data is communicated in ASCII code, the second character " " can be designated a blank space (code: 20H).

(4) Precautions
(a) Number of connected modules
In the connection with external devices using the MC protocol, the number
of Motion controllers set as "MELSOFT connection" in the Open Settings
on Built-in Ethernet Port setting of Basic Setting can be connected
simultaneously.

(b) Data communication frame

Table below shows the frames available in the communication function
using the MC protocol with PERIPHERAL I/F.

Communication function using the MC protocol

Communication frame
with PERIPHERAL I/F
4E frame
QnA-compatible 3E frame
A-compatible 1E frame

: Available, : Not available

(c) Access range

1) Only Motion controller connected by Ethernet can be accessed.
Accessing a Motion controller not connected by Ethernet results in an
error.

(d) Precautions when UDP protocol is selected

1) If a new request message is sent to the same UDP port while the port
waits for a response message, the new request message is discarded.
2) Setting same host station port number to multiple UDP ports is regarded
as one setting. When communicating with multiple external devices
using the same host station port number, select TCP protocol.

13 - 12
13 AUXILIARY FUNCTION

(e) Response message receive processing

Figure below shows an example of the response message receive
processing on the external device side.

Communication processing
on the external device side

Request message send processing

Response message receive processing

TCP connection is closed.

Is TCP connection open?

Receive the rest of

response messages.
Has the data The monitoring timer has run over.
been received within the
monitoring timer?

The receive data exceeds

the size limit.
Check the receive data size.

The response message

for the following request
has been received.
Processing for response messages

Has processing
for all received messages
completed?

END Error processing

REMARK
Personal computers use the TCP socket functions internally for Ethernet
communication.
These functions do not have boundary concept. Therefore, when data is sent by
executing the "send" function once, the "recv" function needs to be executed once or
more to receive the same data.
(One execution of the "send" function does not correspond to one execution of the
"recv" function.)
For this reason, receive processing described above is required on the external
device side.
If the "recv" function is used in blocking mode, data may be read by executing the
function once.

13 - 13
13 AUXILIARY FUNCTION

(5) Error codes for communication using MC protocol

Table below shows the error codes, error descriptions, and corrective actions that
will be sent from the Motion contrller to an external device when an error occurs
during communication using the MC protocol.
Error code
No. Description Corrective action
(Hexadecimal)
Refer to the QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design,
Motion controller detected error (Error that occurred in
1 4000H to 4FFFH Maintenance and Inspection) and take corrective
other than communication using the MC protocol)
action.
When the setting for online change is disabled on the
• When enabling online change, write data.
Built-in Ethernet Port Setting of Basic Setting in
2 0055H • Change the status of the Motion controller to STOP
MT Developer2, an external device requested online
and write data.
change to the Motion controller.
When the communication data code setting is set to • Set the communication data code to binary code and
ASCII code in the Built-in Ethernet Port Setting, ASCII restart the Motion controller for communication.
3 C050H
code data that cannot be converted to binary code was • Correct the send data on the external device side and
received. resend the data.
The number of device points for reading/writing is Correct the number of device points for reading/writing
4 C051H to C054H
outside the allowable range. and resend the data to the Motion controller.
Correct the start address or the number of device
The read/write request data exceeds the allowable points for reading/writing, and resend the data to the
5 C056H
address range. Motion controller.
(Do not exceed the allowable address range.)
The request data length after the ASCII to binary Correct the text data or the request data length of the
6 C058H conversion does not match the data size of the header data, and resend the data to the Motion
character area (a part of text data). controller.
• The command and/or subcommand are specified
• Check the request data.
incorrectly.
7 C059H • Use commands and/or subcommands supported in
• The command and/or subcommand not supported in
the Motion controller.
the Motion controller are specified.
The Motion controller cannot read/write data from/to
8 C05BH Check the device for reading/writing data.
the specified device.
Correct the request data (such as subcommand
The request data is incorrect. (ex. specifying data in
9 C05CH correction) and resend the data to the Motion
units of bits for reading/writing of word devices)
controller.
Perform the monitor registration before monitor
10 C05DH Monitor registration is not performed.
operation.
• Correct the network number, PC number, request
The external device sent a request that cannot be destination module I/O number, and request
11 C05FH
executed in the Motion controller. destination module station number.
• Correct the read/write request data.
The request data is incorrect. (ex. incorrect Correct the request data and resend the data to the
12 C060H
specification of data for bit devices) Motion controller.
Correct the text data or the request data length of the
The request data length does not match the data size
13 C061H header data, and resend the data to the Motion
of the character area (a part of text data)
controller.
The device memory extension cannot be specified for Read/Write data to the device memory without
14 C070H
the target station. specifying the extension.
Data that cannot communicate in the Motion controller • Check the request data.
15 C0B5H
or Ethernet module is specified. • Stop the current request.

13 - 14
13 AUXILIARY FUNCTION

13.4 Synchronous encoder for drive module

The synchronous encoder is used to operate the virtual axis (virtual main
shaft, virtual auxiliary input axis) with the external input pulse.

Item MR-MQ100
The current value immediately before power supply OFF is
Power cycle stored.
Current value storage register (The travel value is not added in power supply OFF.)
(D1120, D1121) Real mode Updated
Updated
Virtual mode
(Updated with clutch ON, and stopped with clutch OFF.)
Current value after synchronous Power cycle "0" is stored
encoder axis main shaft’s Real mode Backup
differential gear storage registers
Virtual mode Updated
(D1126, D1127)
Real mode All errors can be reset regardless of the error type.
Error reset command
Errors can be reset according to the mechanical system
(M5440) Virtual mode
configuration.
Synchronous encoder current Real mode Executable
value change (CHGA-E) Virtual mode Executable

(1) Synchronous encoder current value monitor in real mode

The synchronous encoder set in the system setting is updated for every
operation cycle in the current value storage register (D1120, D1121) regardless
of whether or not the synchronous encoder is set in the mechanical program.
However, the current value after synchronous encoder axis main shaft’s
differential gear storage registers (D1126, D1127) is updated in only virtual
mode.

(2) Error reset of the synchronous encoder axis

The error reset command (M5440) can be executed in both of the real mode
and virtual mode.
If the error reset command (M5440) is turned ON when the synchronous
encoder and output module are normal, the minor error code storage register
(D1122) and major error code storage register (D1123) are cleared, and the
error detection signal (M4640) is reset.

(3) Synchronous encoder current value change (CHGA-E)

The synchronous encoder current value change (CHGA-E) of the synchronous
encoder set in the system setting can be changed regardless of whether or not
the synchronous encoder is set in the mechanical program.

13 - 15
13 AUXILIARY FUNCTION

MEMO

13 - 16
14 ERROR CODE

14. ERROR CODE

MR-MQ100 detects errors as below.

Refer to each programming manuals for details.

Error items Manuals

Self-diagnosis errors Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller Programming
Manual(COMMON)
System setting errors
IB(NA)-0300134
Servo program setting errors
Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller SV13/SV22
Minor errors
Programming Manual (REAL MODE)
Positioning error Major errors
IB(NA)-0300136
Servo errors
Motion SFC Errors Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller SV13/SV22
Programming Manual (Motion SFC)
Motion SFC parameter errors 14
IB(NA)-0300135
Real/Virtual mode switching errors Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller SV22 Programming
Drive module errors Manual (VIRTUAL MODE)
Output module errors IB(NA)-0300137

14.1 Self-diagnosis errors

When an error occurs, check the error code and details using the "Motion CPU Error.
Batch Monitor" of MT Developer2, then troubleshoot the causes of the error.

System setting error

Self-diagnosis error

Positioning error
Motion SFC error
Motion SFC parameter error

Servo program setting error

Real/Virtual mode switching error

14 - 1
14 ERROR CODE

Below table shows Self-diagnosis errors.

Table 14.1 Self-diagnosis errors

error code Common Error Individual Error data 7 segments Operating status
item error message
(SD0) data(SD5 to SD15) (SD16 to SD26) LED of CPU
Power supply 1500 DC DOWN — — No error Continue
"BT1" is on
Battery 1600 BATTERY ERROR Drive name — Continue
"BT2" is on

Diagnosis
error code Contents and causes Corrective action
timing
1500 Always 24VDC power supply has stopped supplying power. Check the power supply.
(1) Voltage of the CPU has dropped below stipulated level .
(1) Replace the battery
1600 Always (2) The lead connector of CPU battery has not been
(2) Install a lead connector.
installed.

14.2 System setting errors

Below table shows System setting errors

Table 14.2 System setting error

7 segments Error code Operation at
Error name (Note-1) (Note-2)
error cause Check timing
LED error occurrence
AMP No. SETTING • Servo axis is not set in system setting.
• System setting data is not written.
SYS.SET DATA ERR •System setting data is written before "Relative check"
Or It is written with an error of "Relative check".
AXIS No. ERROR • System setting data is not written.
• Operating system software data type
ROM ERROR1
written to ROM is different. Cannot be
ROM ERROR2 • Data is not written to ROM. When the started.
"AL" 3 times 10014 • ROM data size is wrong. power is turned (Motion
(Note-3)
flashes •Execute ROM write again. ON/ the key is controller

ROM ERROR3(**) •Check for version adjustment reset. system setting

of the motion controller, MT Developper2 error).

and operating system software.

• ROM data is wrong.
•Execute ROM write again.
ROM ERROR4(**) •Check for version adjustment of
the motion controller, MT Developper2
and operating system software.
Note-1 : ["AL" flashes 3 times "L01" turns on ] is continuously repeated. (No error code on 7-segments LED.
Note-2 : This error code is stored in Self-diagnosis error (SD0).
Note-3 : When error code 10014 occurs. System setting error flag (M2041) turns ON and the applicable
error name shown above is displayed on the error list monitor of the MT Developer2.

14 - 2
14 ERROR CODE

14.3 Servo program setting error

MR-MQ100 has the same "Servo program setting errors" as Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU

except for the below error. Refer to "Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion controller
SV13/SV22 Programming Manual (REAL MODE)" for all other errors.

Table 14.3 Servo programming setting error

Error
Error name Error contents Error processing Corrective action
code
Rapid stop The rapid stop deceleration
Control with the setting value Set the rapid stop deceleration time within
51 deceleration time time is bigger than the setting
of deceleration time. the range of 1 to deceleration time.
setting error value of deceleration time.

14 - 3
14 ERROR CODE

MEMO

14 - 4
15 EMC DIRECTIVES

15. EMC DIRECTIVES

Compliance to the EMC Directive, which is one of the EU Directives, has been a legal
obligation for the products sold in European countries since 1996 as well as the Low
Voltage Directive since 1997.
Manufacturers who recognize their products are compliant to the EMC and Low
Voltage Directives are required to declare that print a "CE mark" on their products.

MITSUBISHI PASSED
MOTION CONTROLLER
MODEL
MR-MQ100
SERIAL B98054306
80M1 IND. CONT. EQ
C UL US LISTED CE mark
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC JAPAN

(1) Authorized representative in Europe

Authorized representative in Europe is shown below.
Name : Mitsubishi Electric Europe BV
Address: Gothaer strase 8, 40880 Ratingen, Germany

15.1 Requirements for Compliance with the EMC Directive

The EMC Directive specifies that products placed on the market must be so
constructed that they do not cause excessive electromagnetic interference
(emissions) and are not unduly affected by electromagnetic interference (immunity)".
Section 15.1.1 through Section 15.1.4 summarize the precautions on compliance with
the EMC Directive of the machinery constructed with the Motion controllers.
These precautions are based on the requirements and the standards of the regulation,
however, it does not guarantee that the entire machinery constructed according to the
descriptions will comply with above-mentioned directive. The method and judgement
for complying with the EMC Directive must be determined by the person who
construct the entire machinery.
8

15 - 1
15 EMC DIRECTIVES

15.1.1 Standards relevant to the EMC Directive

The standards relevant to the EMC Directive are listed in table below.
Certification Test item Test details Standard value
(Note-2)
30M-230MHz QP : 40dBμV/m
EN55011:2007/A2:2007 Radio waves from the product are (10m (32.81ft.) in measurement range)
(Note-1)
Radiated emission measured. 230M-1000MHz QP: 47dBμV/m
(10m (32.81ft.) in measurement range)
AC power line
0.15M-0.5MHz QP : 79dBμV
(Note-5)
EN61000-6-4:2007 (Note-3) AV : 66dBμV
EN55011:2007/A2:2007
EN61131-2:2007 0.5M-30MHz QP: 73dBμV
(Power line) Noise from the product to the power
(Note-4) AV: 60dBμV
EN55022:2006/A1:2007 line and electrical communication port
Electrical communication port
(Electrical communication port) is measured.
0.15M-0.5MHz QP, AV: Logarithmic
Conducted emission
decrease
0.5M-30MHz QP: 87dBμV
AV: 74dBμV
EN61000-4-2:1995 8kV: 10 times at 1 second interval,
+A1:1998+A2:2001 Immunity test in which electrostatic Air discharge
Electrostatic discharge discharge is applied to the product. 4kV: 10 times at 1 second interval,
immunity Contact discharge
80-1000MHz 10V/m,
EN61000-4-3:2006 Immunity test in which electric fields 1400M-2000MHz 3V/m,
(Note-1)
Radiated immunity are radiated to the product. 2000M-2700MHz 1V/m,
80%AM modulation @1kHz
EN61000-4-4:2004 Immunity test in which burst noise is AC power line: ±2kV/5kHz
Electrical fast transient/ applied to the power cable and signal DC power line: ±2kV/5kHz
burst (EFT/B) immunity line. I/O, communication line: ±1kV/5kHz
AC power line
EN61000-6-2:2005 Common mode: ±2.5kV
EN61131-2:2007 Differential mode: ±1.5kV
EN61000-4-5:2006 Immunity test in which surge is applied DC power line
Surge immunity to the power line and signal line. Common mode: ±0.5kV
Differential mode: ±0.5kV
I/O, communication line
Common mode: ±1kV
EN61000-4-6:2007 Immunity test in which high frequency
0.15-80MHz,
+A:2001 noise is applied to the power line and
80%AM modulation @1kHz, 10Vrms
Conducted immunity signal line.
(Note-3)
EN61000-4-11:2004 Immunity test in which power supply
0% of rated voltage, 250cycle
Short interruptions immunity has short interruptions.
(Note-3)
EN61000-4-11:2004 Test in which voltage dip is applied to 40% of rated voltage, 10cycle
Voltage dip the power supply. 70% of rated voltage, 25cycle
(Note-3)
EN61131-2:2007 Immunity test in which voltage dip is
EN61131-2:2007 0% of rated voltage, 0.5cycle 20 times
Voltage dip immunity applied to the power supply.
(Note-1): This product is an open type device (a device designed to be housed inside other equipment) and must be installed inside a
conductive control panel.
The corresponding test has been done with the programmable controller installed inside a control panel.
(Note-2): QP : Quasi-peak value
(Note-3): For the AC power supply line.
(Note-4): For the electrical communication port.
(Note-5): AV: Average value

15 - 2
15 EMC DIRECTIVES

15.1.2 Installation instructions for EMC Directive

(1) Installation
Motion controller is an open type device and must be installed inside a control
panel for use.
This not only ensures safety but also ensures effective shielding of Motion
controller-generated electromagnetic noise.

(a) Control panel

1) Use a conductive control panel.
2) When attaching the control panel's top plate or base plate, expose bare
metal surface and weld so that good surface contact can be made
between the panel and plate.
3) To ensure good electrical contact with the control panel, mask the paint
on the installation bolts of the inner plate in the control panel so that
contact between surfaces can be ensured over the widest possible area.
4) Ground the control panel with a thick wire so that a low impedance
connection to ground can be ensured even at high frequencies.
5) Holes made in the control panel must be 10cm (3.94inch) diameter or
less. If the holes are 10cm (3.94 inch) or larger, radio frequency noise
may be emitted.
In addition, because radio waves leak through a clearance between the
control panel door and the main unit, reduce the clearance as much as
practicable.
The leakage of radio waves can be suppressed by the direct application
of an EMI gasket on the paint surface.

(2) Connection of power line and ground wire

It is necessary to use the Motion controller grounding terminal only when it is in
the grounded condition. Be sure to ground the grounding for the safety reasons
and EMC Directives.
Ground wire and power supply cable for the Motion controller system must be
connected as described below.
(a) Provide an grounding point near the FG terminals. Ground the FG terminals
(FG : Frame Ground) with the thickest and shortest wire possible. (The wire
length must be 30cm (11.81inch) or shorter.) The FG terminals function is to
pass the noise generated in the Motion controller system to the ground, so
wire the ground wire as short as possible to ensure a low impedance.
The wire itself carries a large noise content and thus short wiring means
that the wire is prevented from acting (noise emission) as an antenna.

15 - 3
15 EMC DIRECTIVES

(3) Cables
The cables extracted from the control panel contain a high frequency noise
component. On the outside of the control panel, therefore, they serve as
antennas to emit noise. To prevent noise emission, use shielded cables for the
cables and may be extracted to the outside of the control panel.
The use of a shielded cable also increases noise resistance.
If a shielded cable is not used or not grounded correctly, the noise resistance will
not meet the specified requirements.

(a) Grounding of shield section of shield cable

1) Ground the exposed shield section of the shielded cable close to the
module. When the grounded cables and the not yet grounded cables
are bundled, the cables might be induced to electromagnetic.
2) Ground the exposed shield section to spacious area on the control
panel. A clamp can be used as shown in Figure 15.2.
In this case, mask the inner wall surface when coating the control panel,
and contact the exposed shield section with the clamp at the exposed
bare metal surface.
Screw

Clamp fitting
Shield section

Shield cable

Exposed bare
metal surface

Figure 15.1 Part to be exposed Figure 15.2 Shield grounding (Correct example)

Note) The method of grounding with a vinyl-coated wire soldered onto

the shielded section of the shielded cable as in shown Figure
15.3 is not recommended. Doing so will raise the high-frequency
impedance, resulting in loss of the shielding effect.

Shield cable
Wire

Solderless terminal, crimp contact

Figure 15.3 Shield grounding (Incorrect example)

(4) Precautions for static electricity

There are weak points to static electricity on a surface of modules. Before
touching the modules, always touch grounded metal, etc. to discharge static
electricity from human body. Failure to do so may cause the modules to fail or
malfunction. And do not directly touch the module's conductive parts and
electronic components. Touching them could cause an operation failure or give
damage to the module.

15 - 4
15 EMC DIRECTIVES

15.1.3 Parts of measure against noise

(1) Ferrite core

A ferrite core has the effect of reducing noise in the 30MHz to 100MHz band.
It is not required to fit ferrite cores to cables, but it is recommended to fit ferrite
cores if shield cables pulled out of the enclosure do not provide sufficient
shielding effects.
Note that the ferrite cores must be fitted to the cables in the position immediately
before they are pulled out of the enclosure. If the fitting position is improper, the
ferrite will not produce any effect.
• Ferrite core (Recommended product)
Manufacturer Model name
TDK ZCAT3035-1330

(2) Noise filter (power supply line filter)

A noise filter is a component which has an effect on conducted noise.
The attachment of the noise filter to the power supply line of the servo amplifier
or the controller is effective for the reducing noise.
(The noise filter has the effect of reducing conducted noise of 10 MHz or less.)

The precautions required when installing a noise filter are described below.
(a) Do not bundle the wires on the input side and output side of the noise filter.
When bundled, the output side noise will be induced into the input side
wires from which the noise was filtered.
Input side Input side
(power supply side) (power supply side)

Induction
Noise filter Noise filter
Output side Output side
(device side) (device side)

The noise will be included when the Separate and lay the input and
input and output wires are bundled. output wires.

Figure 15.4 Precautions on noise filter

(b) Ground the noise filter grounding terminal to the control cabinet with the
shortest wire possible (approx. 10cm (3.94 inch)).
• Noise ferrite (Recommended product)
Manufacturer Model name
Mitsubishi electric FR-BLF
Soshin Electric HF3010A-UN

15 - 5
15 EMC DIRECTIVES

(3) Cable clamp

It is also possible to ground the exposed shielded part of the cable to the panel
with the cable clamp.
• Ground the shield at a position 20 to 30cm (7.87 to 11.81 inch) away from the
module.
• When the cables pulled out from the control panel, ground the cables at a
position 5 to 10cm (1.97 to 3.94inch) near the input/output hole of the control
panel with the cable clamp.

Motion controller

Inside control panel

20 to 30cm
(7.87 to 11.81 inch)
AD75CK
AD75CK

5 to 10cm
(1.97 to 3.94 inch)

• Cable clamp (Recommended product)

Manufacturer Model name
AERSBAN-DSET
Mitsubishi electric AERSBAN-ESET
AD75CK

15 - 6
15 EMC DIRECTIVES

15.1.4 Example of measure against noise

The example of corrective action to use noise suppression modules is shown below.

Control panel A
: AD75CK cable clamp
Motion controller
: Ferrite core
PULL

Ethernet cable (Recommended product: ZCAT3035-1330)

(
(Shield tuisted pair of category 5 or more)
NF : NFB (NF30CS2P10A)

: Line Filter (FR-BLF)

Internal I/F SSCNET cable
connector
Internal I/F
connector cable
Manual pulse generator/Synchronous encoder
1)
4) 4)

Input,Output
2) Internal I/F
connector cable

1)
24VDC
AC power power supply
NF
supply

3)

1) Ground the FG terminal of the Motion controller and 24VDC power supply module to the control panel.
2) Measure against noise of the power supply cable (24VDC twisted cable)
• Wire the power supply cable as short as possible using the twisted cable.
• Install a ferrite core at a position 20 to 30cm (7.87 to 11.81inch) away from the product.
3) Install a line filter in the secondary side of NF. (Approx. 4 turn)
4) Measure against noise of the internal I/F connector cable
• Ground the cables at a position 30 to 40cm (11.81 to 15.75inch) away from the module with the cable clamp, etc.
• When the cables are extracted from the control panel, ground the cables at a position 5 to 10cm (1.97 to 3.94inch) away
from the exit/entrance of the control panel with the cable clamp, etc.
• Refer to Section 2.5.2(b) for the internal I/F connector cable. Use the shielded twisted pair cable and correctly
wire the internal I/F connector cable.

(1) Refer to Chapter 2 and appendix for the following cables.

• Ethernet cable
• SSCNET cable

(2) Refer to Section 2.5.2(b) and APPENDIX 1.3 for the internal I/F connector cable.
Use the shielded twisted pair cable and correctly wire the internal I/F connector
cable.

(3) In wiring inside the panel, the power line connected to the power or servo
amplifier and the communication cable such as bus connection cable or network
cable must not be mixed. If the cables are installed closely with each other for
wiring reasons, using a separator (made of metal) can make the cables less
influenced by noise.
Mixing the power line and communication cable may cause malfunction due to
noise.
15 - 7
15 EMC DIRECTIVES

MEMO

15 - 8
APPENDICES

APPENDICES

APPENDIX 1 Cables

In this cable connection diagram, maker names of connectors are omitted. Refer to
"APPENDIX 2.3 Connector" for maker names of connectors.

APPENDIX 1.1 SSCNET cables

Generally use the SSCNET cables available as our products.

(1) Model explanation

Numeral in the column of cable length on the table is a symbol put in the " " part
of cable model. Cables of which symbol exists are available.
Cable length [m(ft.)] Application/
Cable model 0.15 0.3 0.5 1 3 5 10 20 30 40 50
Flex life remark
(0.49) (0.98) (1.64) (3.28) (9.84) (16.40) (32.81) (65.62) (98.43) (131.23) (164.04)

Standard code for

MR-J3BUS†M 015 03 05 1 3 Standard
inside panel
Standard cable for
MR-J3BUS†M-A 5 10 20 Standard
outside panel App.
(Note-1) Long distance
MR-J3BUS†M-B 30 40 50 Long flex
cable

(Note-1) : For the cable of less than 30[m](98.43[ft.]), contact your nearest Mitsubishi sales representative.

(2) Specifications
Description
SSCNET cable model MR-J3BUS M MR-J3BUS M-A MR-J3BUS M-B
0.15 0.3 to 3 5 to 20 30 to 50
SSCNET cable length [m(ft.)]
(0.49) (0.98 to 9.84) (16.40 to 65.62) (98.43 to 164.04)
Minimum bend radius Reinforcing coat cable: 50 (1.97) Reinforcing coat cable: 50 (1.97)
25(0.98)
[mm(inch)] Code: 25 (0.98) Code : 30(1.18)
Tension strength [N] 70 140 420 (Enforced covering cord) 980 (Enforced covering cord)

Temperature range -40 to 80 -20 to 70

for use [°C(°F)] (Note-1) (-40 to 176) (-4 to 158)

Ambient Indoors (no direct sunlight), No solvent or oil

4.4 0.4
(0.09 0.008)
2.2 0.2
(0.09 0.003)
2.2 0.07

4.4 0.1 (0.17 0.016)

(0.09 0.003)

Optical cable
2.2 0.07

(0.17 0.004)
(Code)

2.2 0.07
External appearance
(0.09 0.003)
[mm(inch)]

10.16(Note-2) 4.4 0.1

(0.40) (0.17 0.004) 6 0.2
7.6 0.5
(0.24 0.008)
(0.30 0.02)

(Note-1): This temperature range for use is the value for optical cable (cord) only.
(Note-2): Dimension of connector fiber insert location. The distance of two cords is changed by how to bend it.

App - 1
APPENDICES

POINT
(1) If the end face of code tip for the SSCNET cable is dirty, optical transmission
is interrupted and it may cause malfunctions. If it becomes dirty, wipe with a
bonded textile, etc. Do not use solvent such as alcohol.

(2) If the end face of code tip for SSCNET cable is dirty, optical transmission is
interrupted and it may cause malfunctions. If it becomes dirty, wipe with a
bonded textile, etc. Do not use solvent such as alcohol.

(3) When incinerating the SSCNET cable (optical fiber), hydrogen fluoride gas or
hydrogen chloride gas which is corrosive and harmful may be generated. For
disposal of the SSCNET cable (optical fiber), request for specialized
industrial waste disposal services who has incineration facility for disposing
hydrogen fluoride gas or hydrogen chloride gas.

(a) MR-J3BUS M
1) Model explanation
Type: MR-J3BUS M-
Symbol Cable type
None Standard code for inside panel
A Standard cable for outside panel
B Long distance cable

Symbol Cable length [m(ft.)]

015 0.15(0.49)
03 0.3(0.98)
05 0.5(1.64)
1 1(3.28)
3 3(9.84)
5 5(16.40)
10 10(32.81)
20 20(65.62)
30 30(98.43)
40 40(131.23)
50 50(164.04)

2) Exterior dimensions
• MR-J3BUS015M
[Unit: mm(inch)]
15 13.4 37.65
6.7(0.26) (0.59) (0.53) (1.48)
Protective tube
20.9(0.82)

150 +50
-0

(5.91)
(0.31)
8+0
2.3(0.09)
1.7(0.07)

App - 2
APPENDICES

• MR-J3BUS03M to MR-J3BUS3M
[Unit: mm(inch)]

Refer to the table of this section (1) for cable length (L).

Protective tube (Note)

100 100
(3.94) . (3.94)

(Note) : Dimension of connector part is the same as that of MR-J3BUS015M.

• MR-J3BUS5M-A to MR-J3BUS20M-A,MR-J3BUS30M-B to
MR-J3BUS50M-B
Refer to the table of this section (1) for cable length (L).
Variation [mm(inch)]
SSCNET cable
A B
MR-J3BUS5M-A to MR-J3BUS20M-A 100(3.94) 30(1.18)
MR-J3BUS30M-B to MR-J3BUS50M-B 150(5.91) 50(1.97)

[Unit: mm(inch)]
Protective tube
(Note)

(A) (B) (B) (A)

L

(Note) : Dimension of connector part is the same as that of MR-J3BUS015M.

POINT
Keep the cap and the tube for protecting light code end of SSCNET cable in a
plastic bag with a zipper of SSCNET cable to prevent them from becoming dirty.

App - 3
APPENDICES

APPENDIX 1.2 24VDC power supply cable

(1) Connection diagram

(a) Model explanation
Type: Q170MPWCBL M-
Symbol Cable type
None Without EMI terminal
E With EMI terminal

Symbol Cable length [m(ft.)]

2 2(6.56)

(b) Q170MPWCBL2M (Without EMI terminal)

MR-MQ100 side Solderless terminal
2A 2B

1A 1B

1827587-2 (Terminal)
1-1827864-2 (Connector) Solderless terminal size: R1.25-3.5

24V(+) 1B 24V(+)
24G 2B 24G
24V(+) 1A
24G 2A
: Twisted pair cable
(Note) : Use a cable of wire size AWG22.

(c) Q170MPWCBL2M-E (With EMI terminal)

MR-MQ100 side Solderless terminal
2A 2B

1A 1B

2
1

1827587-2 (Terminal)
1-1827864-2 (Connector) Solderless terminal size: R1.25-3.5

24V(+) 1B 24V(+)
24G 2B 24G
24V(+) 1A
24G 2A
: Twisted pair cable
(Note) : Use a cable of wire size AWG22.

EMI.COM 2
EMI 1

5556PBTL (Terminal)
5557-02R-210 (Connector)

App - 4
APPENDICES

APPENDIX 1.3 Internal I/F connector cable

Fabricate the MR-MQ100's internal I/F connector cable on the customer side.

(1) Connection diagram of differential-output type

Make the cable within 30m(98.43ft.).

/4/3

*$.  *$.

*$*  *$* &KHHGTGPVKCNQWVRWVV[RG

/CPWCNRWNUGT
*#.  *#. +PETGOGPVCNU[PEJTQPQWUGPEQFGTUKFG
*#*  *#*

*$ 

*# 

5)  8)0&

8  8

5) 

8 

5'. 

5) 

0QVG

&1  &1

%1/ 
1WVRWV
&1  &1

%1/  &1%1/

&+  &+

%1/ 

&+  &+

+PRWV/CTMFGVGEVKQPKPRWVUKFG
&+  &+

%1/ 

&+  &+

&+%1/

() 5JGNN

()

: Twisted pair cable

(Note) : Connect SEL to the SG terminal if differential-output type is used.

App - 5
APPENDICES

(2) Connection diagram of voltage-output/ open-collector type

Make the cable within 30m(98.43ft.).

/4/3

*$. 

*$* 

*#. 

*#* 

*$  *$

XQNVCIGQWVRWV
*#  *# QRGPEQNNGEVQTV[RG
/CPWCNRWNUGT
+PETGOGPVCNU[PEJTQPQWUGPEQFGTUKFG
5)  8)0&

8  8

5) 

8 

5'. 

5) 

0QVG

&1  &1

%1/ 
1WVRWV
&1  &1

%1/  &1%1/

&+  &+

%1/ 

&+  &+

+PRWV/CTMFGVGEVKQPKPRWVUKFG
&+  &+

%1/ 

&+  &+

&+%1/

() 5JGNN

()

: Twisted pair cable

(Note) : When "Voltage-output/Open-collector type" is used, open between SEL and SG.

App - 6
APPENDICES

APPENDIX 2 Exterior Dimensions

APPENDIX 2.1 MR-MQ100

[unit : mm(inch)]

9KVJDCVVGT[
3$#6 9KVJQWVDCVVGT[



















 
 
 


App - 7
APPENDICES

APPENDIX 2.2 Battery holder

(1) Battery holder (For Q6BAT)

[unit : mm(inch)]









 
 
 







PUSH


 
 


(2) Large capacity battery holder (For Q7BAT)

[unit : mm(inch)]










 
 


 






PUSH




 
 
 


App - 8
APPENDICES

APPENDIX 2.3 Connector

(1) 24VDC power supply connector (Tyco Electronics AMP K.K. make)
Type connector : 1-1827864-2
Treminal : 1827587-2
[unit : mm(inch)]













 




(2) Internal I/F connector (HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO. make)

Item Type Core size (AWG) Remark

soldering type connector HDR-E50MSG1+ AWG19 to AWG22 Attachment
Pressure-displacement HDR-E50MAG1+ AWG28 -
type connector HDR-E50MG1+ AWG30 -
connctor case HDR-E50LPH - Attachment

[unit : mm(inch)]



Ǿ












 





App - 9
APPENDICES

(3) SSCNET cable connector

[unit : mm(inch)]

4.8(0.19)

(0.53)
13.4
1.7
(0.07)

(0.59)
15 2.3

9.3(0.37)
(0.26) (0.09)
6.7

17.6 0.2 8
(0.69 0.01) (0.31)
20.9 0.2
(0.82 0.01)

App - 10
WARRANTY

Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.

1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range

We will repair any failure or defect hereinafter referred to as "failure" in our FA equipment hereinafter referred to as
the "Product" arisen during warranty period at no charge due to causes for which we are responsible through the
distributor from which you purchased the Product or our service provider. However, we will charge the actual cost
of dispatching our engineer for an on-site repair work on request by customer in Japan or overseas countries. We
are not responsible for any on-site readjustment and/or trial run that may be required after a defective unit is
repaired or replaced.

[Gratis Warranty Term]

The term of warranty for Product is thirty six (36) months after your purchase or delivery of the Product to a place
designated by you or forty two (42) months from the date of manufacture whichever comes first "Warranty Period".
Warranty period for repaired Product cannot exceed beyond the original warranty period before any repair work.

[Gratis Warranty Range]

(1) You are requested to conduct an initial failure diagnosis by yourself, as a general rule.
It can also be carried out by us or our service company upon your request and the actual cost will be charged.
However, it will not be charged if we are responsible for the cause of the failure.
(2) This limited warranty applies only when the condition, method, environment, etc. of use are in compliance with
the terms and conditions and instructions that are set forth in the instruction manual and user manual for the
Product and the caution label affixed to the Product.
(3) Even during the term of warranty, the repair cost will be charged on you in the following cases;
1) A failure caused by your improper storing or handling, carelessness or negligence, etc., and a failure
caused by your hardware or software problem
2) A failure caused by any alteration, etc. to the Product made on your side without our approval
3) A failure which may be regarded as avoidable, if your equipment in which the Product is incorporated is
equipped with a safety device required by applicable laws and has any function or structure considered to
be indispensable according to a common sense in the industry
4) A failure which may be regarded as avoidable if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual, etc.
are duly maintained and replaced
5) Any replacement of consumable parts (battery, fan, etc.)
6) A failure caused by external factors such as inevitable accidents, including without limitation fire and
abnormal fluctuation of voltage, and acts of God, including without limitation earthquake, lightning and
natural disasters
7) A failure generated by an unforeseeable cause with a scientific technology that was not available at the
time of the shipment of the Product from our company
8) Any other failures which we are not responsible for or which you acknowledge we are not responsible for

2. Onerous Repair Term after Discontinuation of Production

(1) We may accept the repair at charge for another seven (7) years after the production of the product is
discontinued.
The announcement of the stop of production for each model can be seen in our Sales and Service, etc.
(2) Please note that the Product (including its spare parts) cannot be ordered after its stop of production.

3. Service in overseas countries

Our regional FA Center in overseas countries will accept the repair work of the Product; However, the terms and
conditions of the repair work may differ depending on each FA Center. Please ask your local FA center for details.

4. Exclusion of Loss in Opportunity and Secondary Loss from Warranty Liability

Whether under or after the term of warranty, we assume no responsibility for any damages arisen from causes for
which we are not responsible, any losses of opportunity and/or profit incurred by you due to a failure of the Product,
any damages, secondary damages or compensation for accidents arisen under a specific circumstance that are
foreseen or unforeseen by our company, any damages to products other than the Product, and also compensation
for any replacement work, readjustment, start-up test run of local machines and the Product and any other
operations conducted by you.

5. Change of Product specifications

Specifications listed in our catalogs, manuals or technical documents may be changed without notice.
6. Precautions for Choosing the Products
(1) For the use of our Motion controller, its applications should be those that may not result in a serious damage
even if any failure or malfunction occurs in Motion controller, and a backup or fail-safe function should operate
on an external system to Motion controller when any failure or malfunction occurs.
(2) Our Motion controller is designed and manufactured as a general purpose product for use at general industries.
Therefore, applications substantially influential on the public interest for such as atomic power plants and other
power plants of electric power companies, and also which require a special quality assurance system, including
applications for railway companies and government or public offices are not recommended, and we assume no
responsibility for any failure caused by these applications when used.
In addition, applications which may be substantially influential to human lives or properties for such as airlines,
medical treatments, railway service, incineration and fuel systems, man-operated material handling equipment,
entertainment machines, safety machines, etc. are not recommended, and we assume no responsibility for any
failure caused by these applications when used.
We will review the acceptability of the abovementioned applications, if you agree not to require a specific quality
for a specific application. Please contact us for consultation.

IB(NA)-0300150-B